JP6330188B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are given to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). There are some which are configured to be controllable to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result.

  In addition, data for each color is pre-stored for symbols that are identification information to be variably displayed, and whether or not a specific gaming state is achieved by using data according to whether or not a specific gaming state is achieved, etc. There is known a gaming machine that changes the color of a symbol in accordance with (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2001-212314 A

  However, there is a problem that the amount of data increases when the color is changed smoothly or when the color is changed to many colors.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the rendering effect without increasing the data capacity.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine which is one embodiment of the present invention includes a display unit (for example, an image display device 5 or a display unit for gaming), and a gaming machine (pachinko that can perform a predetermined game). Game machine 1, slot machine 1000, etc., and a character image (eg, character image of FIG. 51, hold display) for displaying a specific character (eg, kimono character of FIG. 51, hold display, digestion display, etc.) A character image for digestion, a character image for digestion display, etc.) at least a first character image (for example, image 2-1 in FIG. 52A) in which the specific character is displayed in a first color. The second character image (for example, the image of FIG. 52B) in which the specific character having the same shape as the first character image is displayed in a second color different from the first color. 2-2 etc.) and the first character image so that the specific character in the first character image and the specific character in the second character image overlap each other. Image placement means for placing the second character image on top of each other (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 120 places the image 2-1, image 2-2, etc.), Transparency control means for controlling the transparency of the character image arranged by the image arrangement means (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 120 transmits the images 2-1, 2-2, etc.). includes a processing, etc.) and for controlling the degree, the first character image from the first region to the second region, and the color stepwise from the first color to the second color The second character image is arranged so that the color gradually changes from the second color to the third color from the first area to the second area. The image arrangement means arranges the first character image so as to overlap the front surface of the second character image (for example, at time “Tb1” in FIG. 53, the image 2-1 is changed to the image 2-2). of overlapping the front place), the permeability control means over time changing the permeability of the first character image (for example, at time "Tb2" from the time of FIG. 53 "Tb1", the image 2 -1 transmission can be changed over time) , and it is possible to execute a predetermined control for visually recognizing that the second color is moving between the first area and the second area. And the predetermined part of the specific character is Whether the predetermined control is executed, it is displayed in the same color. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect without increasing the data capacity.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the transparency control means performs control to change the transparency of the first character image over time from non-transmission to complete transmission (for example, the first character As a transmittance control method, as shown in FIG. 53, the transparency of the image 2-1 is changed from “0% (non-transmission)” to “100% (complete transmission)” from time “Tb1” to time “Tb2”. And control to change over time).
According to such a configuration, the specific character can be changed from the first color to the second color, thereby enhancing the effect.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the transparency control means may perform control to change the transparency of the first character image from complete transmission to non-transmission over time. Good (for example, as a second transparency control method, as shown in FIG. 50, the transparency of the image 1-1 is changed from “100% (complete transmission)” to “0% (non-transmission)” over time. Can also be controlled to change to.)
According to such a configuration, the specific character is changed from the second color to the first color, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

(4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the transparency control means sets the transparency of the first character image at a constant rate (for example, based on the frame rate) from the start to the end of the control. You may perform control which changes with time by a ratio etc.).

  According to such a structure, a color can change smoothly and the production effect can be heightened.

(5) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the image storage means is configured such that the specific character (for example, the kimono character in FIG. 51) having the same shape as the first character image has the second color as the second character. A third character image (for example, image 2-3 in FIG. 52C) displayed in a third color different from the color is stored, and the image placement unit stores the second character image (for example, FIG. 52). The second character image is placed in front of the third character image such that the specific character in the image 2-2 in (B) and the specific character in the third character image overlap (for example, 53. At time “Tb2” in FIG. 53, the image 2-2 is placed in front of the image 2-3, and the transparency control means controls the transparency of the first character image (for example, 53. From the time “Tb1” to the time “Tb2” in FIG. 53, the transparency of the image 2-1 is changed over time from “0% (non-transmission)” to “100% (complete transmission)”. (For example, from time “Tb2” to time “Tb3” in FIG. 53), the transparency of the second character image changes from “0% (non-transparent)” to “100% (completely transparent)” over time. You may perform control to change automatically.
According to such a configuration, the specific character also changes to the third color, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

(6) In the above gaming machines (1) to (5), the transparency control means controls the transparency of the second character image in the same manner as the transparency of the first character image. Also good. For example, in the case of the first transparency control method, the control of the transparency of the first character image and the transparency of the second character image may be controlled by common processing (step Sa3). Further, for example, in the case of using the second transparency control method, the control of the transparency of the first character image and the transparency of the second character image may be controlled by common processing (step Sb3).
According to such a configuration, the processing capacity can be prevented from increasing.

(6) In the gaming machines of (1) to (6) above, each of the character images (for example, the character image of FIG. 52) is from the first region (for example, the region above the kimono character's kimono). A gradation region (for example, the kimono character kimono region of FIG. 52) whose color gradually changes over the second region (for example, the region below the kimono character kimono) is located at the same position. The gradation area in one character image (for example, the character image in FIG. 52A) is changed from the first color (for example, green color) to the second color (for example, red) from the first area to the second area. The gradation region in the second character image (for example, the character image in FIG. 52B). , From said first region to the second region the second color (e.g., red color, etc.) from the third color (e.g., color, etc. of blue) or may be changed stepwise to.

  According to such a configuration, the color changes more smoothly from the first region to the second region.

(6) In the above gaming machines (1) to (6), the character image (for example, the character image of FIG. 52) is displayed in a specific color (for example, the color “K9” or the color “R4”). Specific areas (for example, area “16” and area “19”) may be provided at the same position.

  According to the configuration as described above, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the fluctuation category and fluctuation pattern of a low base state. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the fluctuation category and fluctuation pattern of a high base state. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the determination rate of a special figure display result, and the determination rate of jackpot type. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the determination ratio of the fluctuation | variation category of a low base state. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the determination ratio of the fluctuation | variation category of a high base state. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of a low base state. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of a low base state. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of a high base state. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the determination ratio of a temporary stop display pattern. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the determination ratio of the main notice pattern. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the determination ratio of the main notice pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a prohibition condition. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a prohibition condition. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the content of determination. It is a specific example of the change of determination content. It is a specific example of the change of determination content. It is a specific example of the change of determination content. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining another example. It is another specific example. It is explanatory drawing explaining another example. It is explanatory drawing explaining another example. It is another specific example. It is another specific example. As an example of the color space, a color space by additive color mixture is schematically represented. This is a simplified character image. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the color by the 1st transparency control method and the 1st transparency control method. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the color by the 2nd transmittance control method and the 2nd transmittance control method. It is explanatory drawing explaining a character image. It is an example of three types of character images. It is explanatory drawing explaining the 1st transparency control method using three types of character images. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the color by the 1st transparency control method using three types of character images. It is an example of the color obtained using three types of character images. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like, and is a variable display game (a game executed with variable display of identification information) Or, in a special figure game as an example of variable display of identification information), special symbols (also referred to as “special figures”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified, can be changed. Is displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". . The variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images (for example, character images (described later) and the like). In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. And, in response to the start of any one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the variable display result of the decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is displayed. (Final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. In conjunction with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  Decorative designs include, for example, alphanumeric characters (“1”, “2”,...), Chinese numerals (“one”, “two”,...), English letters (“A”, “B”,...), Symbols. , Symbols, figures, pictures (for example, those related to a predetermined motif), or a combination of the above. There are a plurality of types (for example, eight types) of decorative symbols, and a corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  A thing related to a predetermined motif displayed as a picture is called a character. Moreover, what is displayed with alphanumeric characters, Chinese numerals, English characters, symbols, codes, graphics, and the like may be referred to as characters.

  In addition, as described above, an image related to a character displayed as a decorative design or an image related to a character displayed as an effect other than the decorative design is also referred to as a character image. The character in the character image is not limited to, for example, a person (including a fictional person appearing in a novel, a comic, or the like). For example, the characters in the character image include animals and plants (including, for example, anthropomorphized animals and plants that can be used for conversation, and existence with a motif of animals and plants), spiritual animals (including anthropomorphized creatures and animals with a motif of spiritual animals) , Unidentified organisms (including anthropomorphic unidentified organisms and existence using unidentified organisms as motifs) may be used. Characters in the character image are other than living things (for example, crystals, teardrops, spheres, pens, watches, fists, scales, swords, drums of slot machines and pachinko machines, treasure chests, fireworks, robots, ships, rockets, Fuji, stars, etc.), or anthropomorphic thing other than the organism. In addition, characters in character images have concepts such as phenomena, states, and emotions (for example, quantity, order, rights, time, season, love, courage, expectation, waves (in addition to liquid waves, radio waves, etc.), It may be a representation (visualization) of sunlight, shadow, darkness, musical note, spirit, power (including AURA).

  The character in the character image may constitute a background (or a part of the background). That is, for example, in the evening, when a person with a hat sits on the beach, the person, the hat, a long shadow of the person, a wave that strikes, the sun, a scarlet cloud, etc. can all be characters in the character image. Further, as described above, an image relating to a character displayed as a decorative design can also be a character image, so that the character image can form (configure) all or part of the decorative design. Two or more characters may be included in one character image.

  Data for displaying a character image in the display area of the image display device 5 is referred to as character image data. That is, the character image is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5 based on the character image data. However, in the following description, for simplification of description, the character image and the character image data are sometimes referred to as a character image without distinguishing them. For example, the expression of storing character image data may be omitted from the expression of storing character images.

  Below the image display device 5, there is provided a distribution device 200 for distributing the inflowing game balls, and below the distribution device 200, there are provided a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal winning ball device 6B. Yes. The normal winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal winning ball device 6B forms a second starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The game balls that have flowed into the distribution device 200 are distributed to the upper part of the normal winning ball apparatus 6A or the upper part of the normal winning ball apparatus 6B so as to win either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. (Or to facilitate winning).

  A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6 </ b> C is provided below the passing gate 41. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an enlarged open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a third starting prize opening is formed as a starting area.

  As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6C, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the third starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6C, the game ball passes through the third start winning opening by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C, although the game ball can enter the third start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6C may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the third start winning opening by closing the third starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example. As described above, the third start winning opening is changed between an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and a normal open state in which game balls hardly pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter).

  FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sorting apparatus 200. As shown in FIG. 2, an inflow port 201 into which a game ball can flow is provided at the top of the sorting apparatus 200. In addition, a sorting member 202 is provided inside the sorting device 200 for sorting the game balls that have flowed into the sorting device 200 from the inlet 201 into either the left passage 203 or the right passage 204. Further, at the lower part of the sorting device 200, a left outlet 205 from which the game ball that has passed through the left passage 203 can flow out of the sorting device 200, and a game ball that has passed through the right passage 204 can flow out of the sorting device 200. And a right outlet 206 is provided.

  In the example shown in FIG. 2A, a state in which the right passage 204 in the sorting apparatus 200 is shielded by the sorting member 202 and a game ball can pass through the left passage 203 is shown. When the game ball flows into the sorting device 200 from the inlet 201 in the state shown in FIG. 2A, the gaming ball that flows in from the inlet 201 is left by the sorting member 200 as shown in FIG. It is distributed to the passage 203, passes through the left passage 203, and flows out from the left outlet 205. And since the 1st starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is located below the left outlet 205, the game ball flowing out from the left outlet 205 wins the first starting winning opening. .

  Further, when the game ball passes through the left passage 203, the game ball hits the blade portion 202a provided in the rotation shaft portion of the sorting member 202, and the blade portion 202a is pushed by the weight of the game ball, As shown in FIGS. 2 (a) and 2 (b), the sorting member 202 changes from a state of being tilted to the right side to a state of being tilted to the left side. With such a change, as shown in FIG. 2B, the left passage 203 in the sorting apparatus 200 is shielded by the sorting member 202, and the game ball can pass through the right passage 204.

  Next, in such a state, as shown in FIG. 2 (c), when the game ball flows into the sorting device 200 from the inflow port 201, it flows in from the inflow port 201 as shown in FIG. 2 (d). The game balls are distributed to the right passage 204 by the distribution member 200, pass through the right passage 204, and flow out from the right outlet 206. And since the 2nd start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6B is located under the right outflow opening 206, the game ball which flowed out from the right outflow opening 206 wins a 2nd starting winning opening. .

  Further, when the game ball passes the right passage 204, the game ball hits the blade portion 202a provided in the rotation shaft portion of the sorting member 204, and the blade portion 202a is pushed by the weight of the game ball, As shown in FIGS. 2 (c) and 2 (d), the sorting member 202 changes from a state of falling to the left side to a state of falling to the right side. With such a change, as shown in FIG. 2D, the right passage 204 in the sorting apparatus 200 is shielded by the sorting member 202, and the game ball can pass through the left passage 203.

  By performing the operation shown in FIG. 2, in this embodiment, the game balls that have flowed into the sorting device 200 by the sorting member 202 are alternately distributed to the left passage 203 and the right passage 204, and the normal winning ball device The first start winning opening formed on 6A and the second starting winning opening formed on the normal winning ball apparatus 6B can be alternately awarded.

  In the description using FIG. 2, the game balls distributed to the left passage 203 win the first start winning opening at approximately 100%, and the game balls distributed to the right passage 204 perform the second start at approximately 100%. Although a case where a prize is won in the winning opening has been shown, there may be cases where a prize is not necessarily won in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening even if it is distributed to the left passage 203 or the right passage 204. For example, in FIG. 2, the game ball is configured to fall directly below the left outlet 205 and the right outlet 206, but a bottom member is provided at the left outlet 205 and the right outlet 206 to be viewed from the player. The structure is such that the game ball flows to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening after being once guided to the back side, and an opening is provided on the outer side surface of the left passage 203 and the right passage 204, so that the left passage 203 Alternatively, a part of the game balls distributed to the right passage 204 may spill out of the distribution device 200 from the opening and may not win the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Good.

  In the example of FIG. 2, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are provided outside the sorting apparatus 200. However, the sorting apparatus 200, the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, and the normal winning prize are shown. The ball device 6B may be integrally formed, and the first start winning port and the second starting winning port may be provided inside the sorting device 200.

  In addition, in the example of FIG. 2, the case where the distribution device 200 is provided with two passages (the left passage 203 and the right passage 204) is shown, but the number of passages is not limited to two, but three or more passages. It may be provided. When three or more passages are provided, for example, a plurality of passages that can win a prize may be provided in either one or both of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening.

  In addition, in the example of FIG. 2, the case where the sorting member 202 of the sorting device 200 is physically switched to the left and right by the weight of the game ball is shown. For example, a solenoid or a motor for driving the sorting member 202 is used. The distribution member 202 may be driven.

  In addition, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning memory display area 5H, the number of holdings (first special figure holding memory) generated based on the first starting winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Number) or a second start winning opening formed by the game ball passing (entering) a second starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6B, or a third starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C. A hold display for displaying the hold number (second special figure hold memory number) generated based on the third start winning when the game ball passes (enters) is specified.

  Specifically, a first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game using the first special figure or a variable display of decorative symbols is established (the first start prize is awarded). However, the variable display game based on the previously established start condition (first start condition or second start condition) is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied, information regarding variable display corresponding to the satisfied first start condition is stored (held) as the first hold information, and the first Based on the hold information, the hold display is performed in the start winning memory display area 5H. In addition, a second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game using the second special figure or a variable display of decorative symbols is established (second start prize or second prize) 3 is established due to the occurrence of a winning start, etc.), but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition (first start condition or second start condition) is being executed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the big hit gaming state When the second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to being controlled or the like, information relating to the variable display corresponding to the satisfied second start condition is stored as the second hold information (hold) Then, the hold display is performed in the start winning storage display area 5H based on the second hold information. Note that the hold display based on the first hold information and the hold display based on the second hold information are displayed in different display modes (for example, different colors, shapes, and sizes).

  In addition, when there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the third starting winning opening, they are also simply referred to as “start winning opening”. Further, when the first start prize, the second start prize, and the third start prize are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start prize”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. Further, the first holding information and the second holding information are also simply referred to as “holding information” unless particularly distinguished. In addition, the variable display holding memory number obtained by adding the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number is also referred to as a total holding memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number). Further, the first start winning opening (starting area) formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is also referred to as a first starting area, the second starting winning opening (starting area) formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6B, and the normal The third start winning opening (starting area) formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6C is also referred to as a second starting area.

  The hold display based on the first hold information displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed each time the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the last special game or the big hit game state is completed. Corresponding to the change (digestion) of one hold information being erased (digested) one by one. The hold display based on the second hold information displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed each time the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit game state. 2 Corresponding to the change (digestion) of the hold information being erased (digested) one by one.

  For example, when there are a plurality of hold displays in the start winning memory display area 5H when the last special figure game or jackpot game state is ended, the hold display (eg, the oldest display among the plurality of hold displays (for example, When the hold display displayed on the leftmost side of the start winning memory display area 5H is a hold display based on the first hold information, the first start condition is satisfied and the oldest display is displayed from the oldest. When the hold display (hold display based on the first hold information) is digested, and the hold display displayed from the oldest among the plurality of hold displays is the hold display based on the second hold information The hold display (hold display based on the second hold information) displayed since the oldest when the second start condition is satisfied is digested. In addition, with the digestion of the hold display displayed from the oldest, each of the other hold displays is moved to the digested hold display side (for example, the left side). In addition, when there is only one hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H when the last special figure game or the big hit game state is ended, the hold display is a hold display based on the first hold information. If there is, the first start condition is satisfied, and if the hold display is a hold display based on the second hold information, the second start condition is satisfied and the hold display is digested.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number (the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held) in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number (the number of memory in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held) in an identifiable manner.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a third starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is detected by, for example, a third starting opening switch 22C shown in FIG.

  Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the third start switch 22C, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value. In this case, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the third start port switch 22C may be the same or different.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 3, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third starting winning opening, More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) through the winning opening. Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special prize winning port. The second state is disadvantageous to the person.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member The general prize opening may be provided. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are also simply referred to as speakers 8 when not particularly distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, or the like that notifies the shift to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. The sound, voice, etc. suggesting or notifying that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed at the upper position of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the frame 3 for the gaming machine 9U. Hereinafter, when the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as a lamp 9. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the sorting device 200, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the like) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are rendering devices that perform rendering, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes other rendering devices such as a rendering model having a drive unit as the rendering device. Also good.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 performs variable display of the normal symbol such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. For example, the normal symbol display 20 is set based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol, such as the end of the previous general symbol game, is satisfied after the general symbol start condition for the normal symbol start is satisfied. The usual game is started.

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per normal”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Further, a game ball that has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 3, or the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is detected. After the second start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the formed third start winning opening is detected by the third start port switch 22C shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to the end of the big hit gaming state or the like, the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

 In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable symbol display time as the special symbol variable time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, the variable symbol variable symbol is displayed. The resulting definite special symbol (special diagram display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the number “2” is a small hit symbol, The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the result of the specific display is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The large winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols that indicate the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols that indicate the numbers "3" and "7" are normally open round jackpot symbols and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 The door is in the open state in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) that is the first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, the round which changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the 1st state (open state) advantageous to a player is performed. The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0) that the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). Note that in the short-term open big hit state, it is only necessary to control the opening period of the big prize opening to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds may be set to a second round number (eg, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (such as 0.1 second) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The short-term open big hit state is also called a second specific game state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the second round number being less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of any of the special figure games using the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Then, during the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbols is a predetermined value. May reach reach.

  Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  Also, in response to the reach state, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is decreased, a character image different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the display mode of the background image is changed. There are cases in which an effect operation different from that before reaching the reach state is executed by changing the display of a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation of the decorative design. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like before reaching the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be made different (also referred to as “hit reliability” or “hit expectation”). Accordingly, the jackpot reliability can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect is caused to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach having higher hit reliability than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  The big hit reliability (expected degree of big hit) is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) / {(the probability that the effect is executed at the big hit) × (the big hit) (Probability) + (probability that the performance will be executed at times other than jackpot) x (probability that will not be jackpot)} (If the jackpot reliability is “1”, the variable display result is always “hit” become).

  Also, unlike a reach effect, there is a possibility that any reach effect will be executed (the possibility that the decorative symbol variable display state becomes a reach state), or a predetermined reach effect (for example, super reach) will be executed. It may be possible to execute a variable display effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility that the player is likely to be played or that the jackpot reliability is high. For example, during variable display of decorative symbols, variable display effects such as “slip (effect)” and “pseudo-continuity (effect)” realized by variable display operations such as decorative symbols can be executed. In addition to “sliding” and “pseudo ream”, various variable display effects using variable display operations such as decorative symbols may be executed.

  In the variable display effect of “slip”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas) are displayed. 5L, 5R, etc. are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left”) in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols are displayed. The decorative design display area 5L and the “right” decorative design display area 5R or both) are displayed again after changing the decorative design, thereby changing the decorative design to be stopped and displayed. Done. Thus, in the variable display effect of “slip”, a predetermined number of decorative symbols are displayed after temporary display of a plurality of decorative symbols from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the display of a definite decorative symbol resulting in variable display. When the variable display state of the decorative pattern is re-executed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and when the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. is there.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, First, all the decorative symbols (for example, predetermined symbols) are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the start of the variable symbol display to the time when the final symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. After temporarily stopping display of pseudo-stitch chances, etc., re-variable display for starting variable display of all the decorative symbols again in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). Up to) times.

  In the present embodiment, the number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is variable display (first variable) until all the decorative symbols temporarily stop temporarily in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display) number of times (one time), the number of re-variable display (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (final variable display), and re-variability between the first variable display and the last variable display. The number of times of display X (X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the total number of times (X + 2) are grasped. In addition, the number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). For example, in the example of FIGS. 39 and 40, the number of temporary stops is three ((e) in FIG. 39 is the first temporary stop display, (i) in FIG. 39 is the second temporary stop display, ( e) is the third temporary stop display), and the re-variable display count is also three.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-ream, and the second variable display (first revariable display) to the second temporary stop display to the second time. Also referred to as a pseudo-ream, the third variable display (second re-variable display) to the third temporary stop display is also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth variable display (third re-variable display) to the fourth. This temporary stop display is also referred to as a fourth pseudo-ream. For example, in the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, (b) to FIG. 39 (e) in FIG. 39 are also referred to as the first pseudo-continuation, and (f) to FIG. 39 (i) in FIG. Also, FIG. 40 (a) to FIG. 39 (e) are also referred to as a third pseudo-ream. Further, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). In the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is three. That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo-continuations such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-continuation continues”.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row. For example, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed four times based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the variable display three times. You can make it appear as if it has started.

  Further, in the image display device 5, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, an image display as a message, an audio output, light emission (lighting, blinking, light-off), etc., reach effect, “slip”, “pseudo” There is a possibility that any reach effect may be executed by an effect operation different from the variable display effect such as “ream”, a predetermined reach effect (for example, super reach) may be executed, You may make it alert | report to a player that a big hit reliability is high. For example, in order to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility that any reach effect may be executed by displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying an image as a message, outputting sound, emitting light, or the like. The notice effect may be executed.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, pre-read hold information is referred to as target hold information (hold data), and variable display corresponding to the pre-read hold information is also referred to as target variable display. Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information according to the total number of stored memories and the determination result (digestion of the target hold information including during target variable display). Executed during processing), during execution of the hold information prior to the target hold information, during digestion of the target hold information, and use of the hold information before the target hold information There are cases when it is executed during.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a stage action that is a pre-reading advance notice for informing (indicating) to a player that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative pattern by winning of the game ball. Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the winning decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special big win symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol for the special opening game as a special symbol for the special opening game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as “non-probability variable big hit combination”) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations after a predetermined reach production is executed in response to reaching the reach state. The symbol is stopped and displayed. As a normal jackpot combination, any one of the decorative symbols having an even symbol number is aligned and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, alphanumeric “6”). May be displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line).

  In addition, as described above, the decorative design may be a graphic design of a person or a character. For example, when a reach state is reached (a reach state with a decorative design with an odd design number may also be included). A special jackpot combination may be used in which a special decorative pattern (for example, a character “negative” or the like designed in a later manner) is stopped and displayed on the active line. For example, “2”, “Negative” and “2” are stopped after “2” reach, and “3”, “Negative” and “3” are stopped after “3” reach. It is good.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, the predetermined decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed, etc. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time-shortening control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the variable display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variable bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol variable display state is Corresponding to having reached the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, among the multiple types of big hit combinations, a predetermined probability variation big hit combination May be displayed in a stopped manner. As the probable big hit combination, any one of the decorative symbols having an odd symbol number is aligned and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, alphanumeric “7”). May be displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line).

  Also, for example, after reaching the reach state (which may include the reach state with an evenly-decorated decorative pattern), a special decorative pattern (for example, the character “Win” is designed) is effective. It is good also as what is stopped and displayed on a line or a probability variation big hit combination. For example, “2”, “Win”, “2” stopped after “2” reach, or “3”, “Win”, “3” stopped after “3” reach, It is good. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decoration symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decoration symbol.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game has a variable display result of “big hit” This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as “big hit type”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “big change” big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time reduction control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The certainty control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled again in the big hit gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended. Similar to the time-saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when a special number of games (for example, 100 times) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the third start winning opening, such as control for making the tilt control time for performing longer than that for the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts compared to that for the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the third start winning opening along with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as a high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the third start winning opening is in the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, when the high opening control is performed, the game ball is fired toward the right side of the game area (so-called right-handed) so that the game ball starts passing through the passing gate 41 and the normal game is started. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. Next, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time-shortening control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the probability that a special-purpose game can be executed frequently and the variable display result in each special-purpose game will be a “hit” As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “5” is stopped or displayed, or a small bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped or displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols determined in advance as the chance of opening may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable symbol display state of the ornament symbol being reached. In some cases, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit" This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “surprise” big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control may be performed together with the short time control.

  Based on the fact that the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and the variable display result is “small hit” as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the gaming state is not changed, and the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probabilistic big hit combination. In the re-drawing effect, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5, for example, in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R When the same decorative symbols are gathered, the variation is made again, and either the decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination or the decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display).

  After the decisive decorative symbol that is normally a big hit combination is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one round ends in the big hit gaming state at the start of the big hit gaming state or during the round in the big hit gaming state During the big hit that will be a promising change notification effect whether or not to control to the probable change state, such as the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state until the start of the next variable display game A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical component for rendering such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electrical component for effects such as display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8, and all or part of the on / off operation in the lamp 9. Is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined performance operation to be executed.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 has wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the third start port switch 22C, and the count switch 23. It is connected. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the third start port switch 22C, and the count switch 23 detect a game ball as a game medium such as a sensor. Any structure having an arbitrary configuration is possible. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the third start port switch 22C, and the count switch 23, the pachinko gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches connected to the main board 11. (For example, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the glass door (not shown), a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibration, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves) You may have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated. It should be noted that the “variation pattern” in the present embodiment includes a display mode of effect images that are displayed during the variation of the decorative design in addition to the variation mode of the decorative design itself that varies.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit” or the big hit type determination result. Is set.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the variation of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is established.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a second start winning is generated, or The second special symbol display device 4B is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) a third start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6C is detected by the third start opening switch 22C and a third start winning is generated. Is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is established. That is, although it is referred to as the second start opening winning designation command, in addition to the second start winning opening, even when the second starting condition is satisfied by passing (entering) the game ball through the third starting winning opening, A second start opening prize designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as the stored storage information, a first start opening prize designation command for designating whether the start winning prize is given to the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening (or the third starting prize opening) is designated. A second start opening prize designation command is transmitted, and a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for designating the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, and the determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. is there. The command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a variation category (also referred to as a variation pattern type) as a winning determination result.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 21A), the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. Whether or not “small hit” is determined. If “big hit” is determined, the big hit type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category The variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and determines the type of big hit. In addition to being able to recognize, the change category can be recognized based on the value set in the change category command.

  The effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, etc.). . Hereinafter, an effect control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and a light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used for controlling the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numeric data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss” (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “small hit”. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. Good. As a result, by selecting one of the variation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, it is possible to control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 6 shows a specific example of the variation category and variation pattern in the low base state (for example, the low probability low base state / normal state). In FIG. 6, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. In FIG. 6, the description of the variation category in the case of the small hit is omitted, but it is sufficient that one or more variation categories are set as described above.

  The fluctuation category is a classification of fluctuation patterns by type, and is also referred to as a fluctuation pattern type. That is, each variation pattern belongs to one of the variation categories. The fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” is a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time belonging to the fluctuation category “PA1” is shortened. That is, the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the other fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. The variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” are non-reach (lost) variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PA2”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA2-3”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA2-2”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA2-1”. The fluctuation patterns “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” are normal reach (lost) fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation category “PA3”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA3-2”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA3-1”. The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-5” are super reach α (losing) variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PA4”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA4-5”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA4-4”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA4-3”> Special figure fluctuation of fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” Time> Special pattern variation time of variation pattern “PA4-1”. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-5” are super reach β (loss) variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PA5”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA5-5”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA5-4”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA5-3”> Special figure fluctuation of fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” Time> Special pattern fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA5-1”. The fluctuation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” are normal reach (big hit) fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB3-2”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB3-1”. The fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-5” are super reach α (big hit) fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB4-5”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB4-4”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB4-3”> Special figure fluctuation of fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” Time> Special pattern fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB4-1”. The fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-5” are super reach β (big hit) fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB5-5”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB5-4”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB5-3”> Special figure fluctuation of fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” Time> It is the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-1”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, as a whole (on average), the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern belonging to the fluctuation category of the super reach β (variation category “PA5”, fluctuation category “PB5”)> the fluctuation category of the super reach α Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern belonging to (variation category “PA4”, fluctuation category “PB4”)> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern belonging to fluctuation category of normal reach (variation category “PA3”, fluctuation category “PB3”)> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern belonging to normal non-reach fluctuation category (variation category “PA2”)> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern belonging to shortened non-reach fluctuation category (variation category “PA1”) It has become. For example, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern belonging to the fluctuation category “PA5” of the super reach β (losing) and the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern belonging to the fluctuation category “PA4” of the super reach α (losing) were compared. In this case, among the five fluctuation patterns (variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-5”) belonging to the fluctuation category “PA5”, the special figure fluctuation time “of the fluctuation pattern“ PA5-1 ”having the shortest special figure fluctuation time“ 75000 ”> the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern“ PA4-1 ”having the shortest special figure fluctuation time among the five fluctuation patterns (variation patterns“ PA4-1 ”to“ PA4-5 ”) belonging to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”. “60000”. Further, among the five fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation category “PA5”, the special figure fluctuation time “123000” of the fluctuation pattern “PA5-5” having the longest special figure fluctuation time> 5 fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation category “PA4”. Among them, the special figure fluctuation time “108000” of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-5” having the longest special figure fluctuation time is obtained.

  In the variable display of decorative patterns according to each variation pattern shown in FIG. 6, production according to different types of shortened non-reach / normal reach / normal reach / super reach α / super reach β, each special map variation time, etc. (For example, a variable display effect or the like) is executed (may not be executed).

  For example, in the case of a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1”) belonging to a shortened non-reach (losing) variation category (PA1), the special figure variation time is very short, and therefore no effect is executed.

  In the case of a variation pattern (variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”) belonging to the non-reach (losing) variation category (PA2), the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA2— In the variable display of the decorative pattern by “3”), a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo continuous variation frequency “1”) is executed, and the decorative pattern by the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA2-2”) having the second longest special diagram variation time. In the variable display, an effect (for example, sliding) having a relatively short effect time is executed. It should be noted that the effect is not executed in the variable display of the decorative symbols by the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA2-1”) having the shortest special diagram variation time.

  Further, fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns “PA3-1”, “PA3-2”, “PB3-1”, “PB3-2”) belonging to the normal reach fluctuation category (variation category “PA3”, fluctuation category “PB3”). In the case of, in the variable display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA3-2”, “PB3-2”) having a long special diagram variation time, the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous variation frequency “1”) is executed. The pseudo-continuous effect is not executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol by the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA3-1”, “PB3-1”) having a short special diagram variation time.

  Further, in the case of a variation pattern (variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-5”, variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-5”) belonging to the variation category (PA4, PB4) of super reach α. Pseudo-continuous effects according to the diagram change time are executed. For example, in the variable display of the decorative pattern with the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA4-5” “PB4-5”) having the longest special symbol variation time in each variation category (PA4, PB4), the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous variation) Number of times “4”) is executed, and in the variable display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA4-4” “PB4-4”) having the second longest special symbol variation time, “3”) is executed, and in the variable display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA4-3” “PB4-3”) having the third longest special symbol variation time, the pseudo continuous effect (the number of pseudo continuous variation “ 2 ”) is executed, and in the variable display of decorative symbols by the variation pattern (variation pattern“ PA4-2 ”“ PB4-2 ”) having the fourth longest (second shortest) variation time Ylene production (pseudo continuous change the number "1") is executed. In addition, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed in the variable display of the decorative symbols by the variation pattern (variation patterns “PA4-1” and “PB4-1”) having the shortest special diagram variation time.

  Also, in the case of fluctuation patterns (variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-5”, fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-5”) belonging to the fluctuation category (PA5, PB5) of super reach β. This is the same as the variation pattern belonging to the variation category of super reach α.

  In the variable display of decorative symbols by the variation patterns “PA3-1”, “PB3-1”, “PA4-1”, “PB4-1”, “PA5-1”, “PB5-1”, the presentation time A relatively short effect (for example, sliding) may be executed. Further, the pseudo-continuous display effect may be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern by the variation patterns “PA4-2”, “PB4-2”, “PA5-2”, “PB5-2”.

  Note that the pseudo-continuous display effect is an effect in which re-variable display is not performed while pretending to be re-variable display. The effect mode of the pseudo-continuous effect is common to the effect mode of the pseudo-continuous effect in which re-variable display is performed. For example, whether or not to temporarily stop display a symbol (chance symbol) indicating that the quasi-continuation continues in the decorative symbol display area 5C after the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R are not reached. The effect of executing the roaring effect and then temporarily stopping the chance symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5C (the effect of successfully displaying the temporary stop display of the chance symbol) is an aspect of the pseudo-continuous effect (effect mode “normal”). However, one aspect of the pseudo reaming effect is an effect in which the above-mentioned roaring effect is executed, and then the chance symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C (the effect of causing the temporary stop display of the chance symbol to fail). Specifically, in the scene of FIG. 39 (e), the pseudo-gase effect is an effect in which the chance symbol “opportunity” slides down and symbols other than the chance symbol “opportunity” are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, after reaching the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R, an effect of whether or not to temporarily display the chance symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5C is executed, and then the decorative symbol display area is displayed. An effect that makes the 5C stop and display other than the chance symbol without causing the chance symbol to be temporarily stopped (effect that causes the temporary stop display of the chance symbol to fail), or any symbol (chance symbol for the chance symbol) is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C. An effect that develops to super reach without stopping (an effect that causes the temporary stop display of the chance symbol to fail) is also an aspect of the pseudo reaming effect. In addition, after reaching the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R, an effect of whether or not the chance symbol is temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C is executed, and then the decorative symbol display area is displayed. In the case where the chance symbol is temporarily stopped without displaying the chance symbol on the 5C, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped and then the chance symbol is temporarily stopped (the effect that makes the chance symbol temporary stop display successful) or the decorative symbol display area 5C. An effect that temporarily displays a chance symbol as a chance symbol (an effect that makes a temporary stop display of a chance symbol successful) after pretending that any symbol (including a chance symbol) will be developed into a super-reach without stopping. This is an aspect of the continuous effect (the effect aspect “after reach”).

  Further, a roulette effect may be executed instead of or in addition to the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, the roulette effect is executed four times in the variable display of the decorative symbols by the variation patterns “PA4-5”, “PB4-5”, “PA5-5”, “PB5-5”, and the variation patterns “PA4-4” “PB4-4”. ”“ PA5-4 ”“ PB5-4 ”, the roulette effect is executed three times in the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern“ PA4-3 ”“ PB4-3 ”“ PA5-3 ”“ PB5-3 ” The roulette effect is executed twice in the variable display of the symbols, and the roulette effect is executed once in the variable display of the decorative symbols by the variation patterns “PA4-2”, “PB4-2”, “PA5-2”, and “PB5-2”. You may do it.

  FIG. 7 shows a specific example of a variation category and a variation pattern in a high base state (for example, a highly accurate high base state / accurate variation state). In FIG. 7, the variation category “PA-T” is a variation category of a shortened variation (losing) (a variation category without a battle). The variation category “PA-JD” is a variation category of weak enemy battle / minute (losing). The variation category “PA-KD” is a variation category of strong enemy battle / minute (losing). The fluctuation category “PB-JL” is a weak enemy battle / negative (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PB-KL” is a strong enemy battle / negative (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation category “PB-JW” is a variation category of weak enemy battle / win (big hit). The variation category “PB-KW” is a variation category of strong enemy battle / win (big hit). Note that the weak enemy battle is a battle effect (an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character confront each other) against a weak enemy character. A strong enemy battle is a battle performance for a strong enemy character. In this embodiment, a strong enemy battle is a disadvantageous production that is easier to lose than a weak enemy battle. Further, the weak enemy battle is an advantageous performance that is easier to win than the strong enemy battle. In FIG. 7, the description of the variation category in the case of the small hit is omitted, but it is only necessary to set one or more variation categories as described above.

  The variation pattern “PA-T1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time belonging to the variation category “PA-T” is shortened. That is, the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the other fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. In the variation pattern “PA-T1”, the battle effect is not executed. The variation patterns “PA-JD1” and “PA-JD2” are reach variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PA-JD”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA-JD2”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA-JD1”. In the variation patterns “PA-JD1” and “PA-JD2”, a weak enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle is a draw. The variation patterns “PA-KD1” and “PA-KD2” are reach variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PA-KD”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA-KD2”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PA-KD1”. In the variation patterns “PA-KD1” and “PA-KD2”, a strong enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle is a draw. The fluctuation patterns “PB-JL1” and “PB-JL2” are jackpot fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation category “PB-JL”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB-JL2”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB-JL1”. In the fluctuation patterns “PB-JL1” and “PB-JL2”, the weak enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle is lost. The fluctuation patterns “PB-KL1” and “PB-KL2” are jackpot fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation category “PB-KL”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB-KL2”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB-KL1”. In the fluctuation patterns “PB-KL1” and “PB-KL2”, a strong enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle is lost. The fluctuation patterns “PB-JW1” and “PB-JW2” are jackpot fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation category “PB-JW”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB-JW2”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB-JW1”. In the fluctuation pattern “PB-JW1” or “PB-JW2”, a weak enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle wins. The fluctuation patterns “PB-KW1” and “PB-KW2” are jackpot fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation category “PB-KW”. Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB-KW2”> Special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern “PB-KW1”. In the fluctuation pattern “PB-KW1” or “PB-KW2”, a strong enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle wins.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. As an example, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table (described later) that is referred to in order to determine a variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation category determination tables corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state / probability variation state) and the special figure display result (or a plurality of variations corresponding to the number of reserved memories, etc.) Category determination table) is stored. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101. As another example, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table (described later) that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to variation categories and the like are stored. Instead of a plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table including information on all variation pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101. Further, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of command tables (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control commands) used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11. Has been.

  The special figure display result (variable display result) of the special figure game includes a special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101 before the fixed special symbol that is the special figure display result of the special figure game is derived and displayed. This is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result. In the present embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a special figure display result determination table that is referred to when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state (low-probability state), and the gaming state is a probabilistic state ( A special figure display result determination table that is referred to when the state is highly accurate) is stored in the ROM 101. In each special figure display result determination table, a determination value (also referred to as a determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result.

  Also, when the special figure display result “big hit” is determined, before the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101 and the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type are displayed. Based on this, the jackpot type is determined. In this embodiment, the big hit type determination table that is commonly referred to when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state (low probability state) or the probability variation state (high probability state) is used as the big hit type determination table. A table is stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, a determination value to be compared with the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type is assigned to the jackpot type.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of the special figure display result and the determination ratio of the jackpot type. FIG. 8A shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state (the low probability state). According to FIG. 8A, a out of 65536 determination values (65536 from “0” to “65535” shown in FIG. 5) that can be taken by the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is special. The figure display result “big hit” is assigned, and the determination ratio (p1 (%)) of “big hit” is (a / 65536) × 100. For example, when a is 512 from “0” to “511”, p1 is about 0.8% (512 ÷ 65536). p2 is a determination rate of “losing”.

  FIG. 8B shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state (high probability state). According to FIG. 8B, among the 65536 possible determination values (65536 from “0” to “65535” shown in FIG. 5) of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, b are special. The figure display result “big hit” is assigned, and the determination ratio (p3 (%)) of “big hit” is (b / 65536) × 100. However, FIG. 8A shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result in the normal state (low accuracy state), and FIG. 8B shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result in the probability variation state (high accuracy state). > A. For example, when b is 2048 from “0” to “2047”, p3 is about 3.1% (2048 ÷ 65536). p4 is a determination rate of “losing”.

  FIG. 8C shows a case where the special figure display result of the first special figure game is “big hit”, that is, the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, and the special figure display result. Is “big hit”, or the special figure display result of the second special figure game is “big hit”, that is, the variable special figure is the second special figure and the special figure display result is “big hit”. It represents the determination ratio of jackpot type in the case of. According to FIG. 8C, x out of 100 possible values (100 numerical values “0” to “99” shown in FIG. 5) of the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is 100. The pieces are assigned to the jackpot type “first jackpot”, and the determination ratio (x (%)) of “first jackpot” is x. Further, y out of 100 possible values of the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are assigned to the big hit type “second big hit”, and the determination ratio (y (%)) of the “second big hit” is y. Also, z out of 100 possible values of the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are assigned to the big hit type “third big hit”, and the determination ratio (z (%)) of the “third big hit” is z.

  The “first big hit” is a “big hit” from which the “big hit” of “15R probability variation” is derived. The “second big hit” is the “big hit” from which the “big hit” of “10R probability change” is derived. The “third big hit” is a “big hit” from which a “big hit” of “10R normal” is derived. For example, a specific member (not shown) that shifts to a probable change state when a game ball passes (approaches) is provided inside the big prize opening, and “first big hit” is achieved by the control during the execution of the round. Sometimes a “big hit” of “15R probability change” is derived, “a big hit” of “10R probability variation” is derived when “the second big hit” is reached, and “10R normal” “a big hit” is derived when “the third big hit” is achieved. "May be introduced. For example, during the execution of the “third big hit” round, the game winning ball door (or the specific member) is controlled so that the game ball cannot pass (enter) into the specific member or is difficult to pass (enter). During the execution of the “first big hit” or “second big hit” round, the big winning opening door (or the specific member) so that the game ball can pass (enter) or easily pass (enter) the specific member. May be controlled.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of the variation category in the low base state (for example, the low probability low base state / normal state). In FIG. 9, “P” is a jackpot probability in the normal state and corresponds to “p1” in FIG. “X”, “y”, and “z” are distributions (rates) of big hit types at the big hit in the normal state, and are the same as “x”, “y”, and “z” in FIG. 8C. is there. That is, “x” is a determination ratio of “first big hit”, “y” is a determination ratio of “second big hit”, and “z” is a determination ratio of “third big hit”.

  In FIG. 9, “h1” to “h5” are the determination ratios (%) of the variation category at the time of loss in the normal state. “H1” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA1”, “h2” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA2”, “h3” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA3”, and “h4” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA4” The ratio “h5” is the determination ratio of the variation category “PA5”. “H1” + “h2” + “h3” + “h4” + “h5” = 100. “A1” to “a3” are the determination rates (%) of the variation category at the time of the third big hit (10R normal) in the normal state. “A1” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PB3”, “a2” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PB4”, and “a3” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PB5”. “A1” + “a2” + “a3” = 100. “A4” to “a6” are determination rates (%) of the variation category at the time of the second big hit (10R probability variation) in the normal state. “A4” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PB3”, “a5” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PB4”, and “a6” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PB5”. “A4” + “a5” + “a6” = 100. “A7” to “a9” are determination rates (%) of the variation category at the time of the first big hit (15R probability variation) in the normal state. “A7” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PB3”, “a8” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PB4”, and “a9” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PB5”. “A7” + “a8” + “a9” = 100.

  The determination ratio (“h1” to “h5”) of the fluctuation category at the time of losing in the normal state may be a different value depending on the situation (for example, the number of pending storages and the number of fluctuations), or the same regardless of the situation It may be a value. For example, the determination ratio “h1” of the variation category “PA1” may be made different according to the total number of reserved memories, or may be always constant in any total number of reserved memories.

  Hereinafter, an aspect in which the determination rate of the variation category at the time of loss (“h1” to “h5”) is set to the same value regardless of the situation, and the determination rate of the variation category at the time of loss (“h1” to “h5”) A description will be given of each aspect of different values depending on the number of reserved memories.

  In the case of the aspect in which the determination ratio (“h1” to “h5”) of the fluctuation category at the time of loss in the normal state is the same value regardless of the situation, the table for reference of the variable category is used as a table to be referred to at the time of the loss in the normal state. About 100 possible values of random number MR3 (100 from “0” to “99” shown in FIG. 5), h1 is assigned to variation category “PA1”, and h2 is assigned to variation category “PA2”. , One table (referred to as a variation category determination table “C-TBL0”) in which h3 is allocated to the variation category “PA3”, h4 is allocated to the variation category “PA4”, and h5 is allocated to the variation category “PA5”. Prepare it.

  When the variation category determination table “C-TBL0” is used as a table to be referred to at the time of the normal state loss, the CPU 103 refers to the variable category determination table “C-TBL0” at the time of the normal state loss, and determines each variation. By comparing the determination value assigned to the category and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, any one of the variation categories “PA1”, “PA2”, “PA3”, “PA4”, and “PA5” is determined. decide. For example, in the variation category determination table “C-TBL0”, 10 determination values in the range of “0” to “9” are assigned to the variation category “PA1”, and 77 in the range of “10” to “86”. Are assigned to the variation category “PA2”, 10 decision values in the range from “87” to “96” are assigned to the variation category “PA3”, and 2 in the range from “97” to “98”. Is assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one determination value “99” is assigned to the variation category “PA5”, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is When it is “15”, the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA2”.

  On the other hand, in the case of a mode in which the determination ratio (“h1” to “h5”) of the variation category at the time of loss in the normal state is different depending on the number of reserved storage, A plurality of types of variation category determination tables may be prepared in which at least one of h1 to h5 is different. As an example, a variable category determination table (referred to as a variable category determination table “C-TBL1”) referred to when the total number of reserved memories is one, and is referred to when the total number of reserved memories is two or three. Change category determination table (referred to as change category determination table “C-TBL2”), change category determination table referred to when the total number of reserved memories is 4 to 8 (referred to as change category determination table “C-TBL3”) These three types of variation category determination tables may be prepared.

  When the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” are used as tables to be referred to when the normal state is lost, the CPU 103 determines the change category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “when the normal state is lost. From “C-TBL3”, select any variation category determination table corresponding to the total number of reserved storage, refer to the selected variation category determination table, and determine the determination value assigned to each variation category; By comparing with numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, one of the variation categories “PA1”, “PA2”, “PA3”, “PA4”, and “PA5” is determined.

  The determination rate (“a1” to “a3”) of the variation category at the third big hit (normal 10R) in the normal state is the same as the determination rate of the variation category at the time of loss in the normal state (for example, The value may be different depending on the number of fluctuations), or the same value regardless of the situation. For example, the determination ratio “a1” of the variation category “PB3” may be varied according to the total number of reserved memories, or may be always constant in any total number of reserved memories.

  Hereinafter, a mode in which the determination ratio (“a1” to “a3”) of the variation category at the third big hit (10R normal) is the same value regardless of the situation, and the variation category at the third big hit (10R normal) A description will be given of each aspect in which the determination ratios (“a1” to “a3”) are set to different values according to the number of reserved memories.

  In the case of a mode in which the determined rate (“a1” to “a3”) of the variation category at the third big hit (normal 10R) in the normal state is the same value regardless of the situation, the third big hit (normal 10R) in the normal state As a table that is sometimes referred to, for 100 possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, a1 is allocated to the variation category “PB3”, a2 is allocated to the variation category “PB4”, and the variation category “PB5” is allocated. It is sufficient to prepare one table (referred to as a variation category determination table “C-TBL10”) in which a3 are assigned to “”.

  When the variable category determination table “C-TBL10” is used as a table to be referred to at the time of the third big hit (10R normal) in the normal state, the CPU 103 determines the variable category determination table at the time of the third big hit (10R normal) in the normal state. By referring to “C-TBL10” and comparing the determination value assigned to each variation category with the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category, the variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, “ One of “PB5” is determined.

  On the other hand, in the case of a mode in which the determination rate (“a1” to “a3”) of the variation category at the third big hit (10R normal) in the normal state is different depending on the number of reserved storage, the third big hit ( As a table to be referred to during normal 10R, a plurality of types of variation category determination tables in which at least one of the above-described a1 to a3 is different may be prepared. As an example, a variable category determination table (referred to as a variable category determination table “C-TBL11”) that is referred to when the total number of reserved memories is one, and is referred to when the total number of reserved memories is two or three. Variation category determination table (variation category determination table “C-TBL12”), variation category determination table (referred to as variation category determination table “C-TBL13”) referred to when the total number of reserved storage is 4 to 8 These three types of variation category determination tables may be prepared.

  When the variable category determination tables “C-TBL11” to “C-TBL13” are used as tables referred to at the time of the third big hit (10R normal) in the normal state, the CPU 103 makes the third big hit (10R normal) in the normal state. Sometimes, one of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the total number of reserved storages is selected from the variation category determination tables “C-TBL11” to “C-TBL13”, and the selected variation category determination table is referred to. By comparing the determination value assigned to the fluctuation category and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category, one of the fluctuation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” is determined.

  Similarly, the determination ratio (“a4” to “a6”) of the fluctuation category at the time of the second big hit (10R probability change) in the normal state may be a different value depending on the situation (for example, the number of reserved memories and the number of fluctuations). It may be the same value regardless of the situation. For example, the determination ratio “a4” of the variation category “PB3” may be varied according to the total number of reserved memories, or may be always constant in any total number of reserved memories.

  Hereinafter, a mode in which the determination rate (“a4” to “a6”) of the variation category at the second big hit (10R probability change) is the same value regardless of the situation, and the variation category at the second big hit (10R probability change) A description will be given of each aspect in which the determination ratios (“a4” to “a6”) are set to different values according to the number of reserved memories.

  In the case of a mode in which the determination rate (“a4” to “a6”) of the variation category at the second big hit (10R probability change) in the normal state is the same value regardless of the situation, the second big hit (10R probability change) in the normal state As a table that is sometimes referred to, for 100 possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category, a4 are assigned to the fluctuation category “PB3”, a5 are assigned to the fluctuation category “PB4”, and the fluctuation category “PB5” is assigned. It is sufficient to prepare one table (referred to as a variation category determination table “C-TBL20”) in which a6 are assigned to “”.

  When the variation category determination table “C-TBL20” is used as a table to be referred to at the time of the second big hit (10R probability change) in the normal state, the CPU 103 determines the change category determination table at the time of the second big hit (10R probability change) in the normal state. By referring to “C-TBL20” and comparing the determination value assigned to each variation category with the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category, the variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, “ One of “PB5” is determined.

  On the other hand, in the case of the aspect in which the determination ratio (“a4” to “a6”) of the variation category at the second big hit (10R probability change) in the normal state is different depending on the number of reserved storage, As a table to be referred to at the time of (10R probability change), a plurality of types of variation category determination tables in which at least one of the above-described a4 to a6 is different may be prepared. As an example, a variable category determination table (referred to as a variable category determination table “C-TBL21”) that is referred to when the total number of reserved memories is one, and is referred to when the total number of reserved memories is two or three. Variation category determination table (variation category determination table “C-TBL22”), variation category determination table (referred to as variation category determination table “C-TBL23”) referenced when the total number of reserved storage is 4 to 8 These three types of variation category determination tables may be prepared.

  When the variation category determination tables “C-TBL21” to “C-TBL23” are used as tables to be referred to at the time of the second big hit (10R probability change) in the normal state, the CPU 103 causes the second big hit (10R probability change) in the normal state. Sometimes, one of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the total number of reserved storages is selected from the variation category determination tables “C-TBL21” to “C-TBL23”, and the selected variation category determination table is referred to. By comparing the determination value assigned to the fluctuation category and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category, one of the fluctuation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” is determined.

  Similarly, the determination ratio (“a7” to “a9”) of the fluctuation category at the time of the first big hit (15R probability change) in the normal state may be a different value depending on the situation (for example, the number of reserved memories and the number of fluctuations). It may be the same value regardless of the situation. For example, the determination ratio “a7” of the variation category “PB3” may be made different according to the total number of reserved memories, or may be always constant in any total number of reserved memories.

  Hereinafter, a mode in which the determination ratio (“a7” to “a9”) of the variation category at the first big hit (15R probability variation) is the same value regardless of the situation, and the variation category at the first big hit (15R probability variation) A description will be given of each mode in which the determination ratios (“a7” to “a9”) are set to different values according to the number of reserved memories.

  In the case of a mode in which the determination rate (“a7” to “a9”) of the variation category at the time of the first big hit (15R probability change) in the normal state is the same value regardless of the situation, the first big hit (15R probability change) in the normal state As a table that is sometimes referred to, for 100 possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, a7 are allocated to the variation category “PB3”, a8 are allocated to the variation category “PB4”, and the variation category “PB5” It is sufficient to prepare one table (referred to as a variation category determination table “C-TBL30”) in which a9 are assigned to “”.

  When the variation category determination table “C-TBL30” is used as a table to be referred to at the time of the first big hit (15R probability change) in the normal state, the CPU 103 determines the change category determination table at the time of the first big hit (15R probability change) in the normal state. With reference to “C-TBL30”, the determination values assigned to the respective variation categories are compared with the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, so that the variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, “ One of “PB5” is determined.

  On the other hand, in the case where the variable category determination ratios (“a7” to “a9”) at the time of the first big hit (15R probability change) in the normal state are different values depending on the number of reserved storage, the first big hit ( As a table to be referred to at the time of (15R probability change), a plurality of types of variation category determination tables in which at least one of the above-described a7 to a9 is different may be prepared. As an example, a variable category determination table (referred to as a variable category determination table “C-TBL31”) referred to when the total number of reserved memories is one, and is referred to when the total number of reserved memories is two or three. Variation category determination table (variation category determination table “C-TBL32”), variation category determination table referred to when the total number of reserved storage is 4 to 8 (variation category determination table “C-TBL33”) These three types of variation category determination tables may be prepared.

  When the variation category determination tables “C-TBL31” to “C-TBL33” are used as tables to be referred to at the time of the first big hit (15R probability change) in the normal state, the CPU 103 causes the first big hit (15R probability change) in the normal state. Sometimes, one of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the total number of reserved storage is selected from the variation category determination tables “C-TBL31” to “C-TBL33”, and the selected variation category determination table is referred to. By comparing the determination value assigned to the fluctuation category and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category, one of the fluctuation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” is determined.

  Subsequently, specific examples of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” will be described as specific examples of determination values assigned to the above-described variation category determination table. For example, in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, h1 = 0, h2 = 70, h3 = 27, h4 = 2, and h5 = 1 may be set. More specifically, for example, in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, 0 determination values are assigned to the variation category “PA1”, and 70 determination values ranging from “0” to “69” are allocated to the variation category. Assigned to “PA2”, 26 determination values ranging from “70” to “96” are allocated to the variation category “PA3”, and two determination values ranging from “97” to “98” are allocated to the variation category “PA4”. And a single determination value “99” may be assigned to the variation category “PA5”.

  In the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, h1 = 4, h2 = 85, h3 = 8, h4 = 2, and h5 = 1 may be set. More specifically, for example, in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, four determination values in the range of “0” to “3” are assigned to the variation category “PA1”, and “4” to “88” 85 decision values in the range are assigned to the variation category “PA2”, 8 decision values in the range from “89” to “96” are assigned to the variation category “PA3”, and a range of “97” to “98” is assigned. Two determination values may be assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one determination value “99” may be assigned to the variation category “PA5”.

  In the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, h1 = 64, h2 = 25, h3 = 8, h4 = 2, and h5 = 1 may be set. More specifically, for example, in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, 64 determination values ranging from “0” to “63” are assigned to the variation category “PA1”, and “64” to “88” 25 decision values in the range are assigned to the variation category “PA2”, 8 decision values in the range from “89” to “96” are assigned to the variation category “PA3”, and a range of “97” to “98” is assigned. Two determination values may be assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one determination value “99” may be assigned to the variation category “PA5”.

  In the specific examples of the above-described variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” is more easily determined when the number of reserved storage is large than when it is small. In addition, the determination ratio of the fluctuation category (fluctuation category “PA4” or fluctuation category “PA5”) of the super reach (losing) is made constant regardless of whether the number of reserved memories is large or small.

  Further, in the specific examples of the above-described variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3”, any of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” is the same (common). There is a determination value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the fluctuation category. That is, if it is a certain determination value, the same variation category is determined in any of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3”. For example, in any of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA5” is determined when the random value MR3 is “99”, and “97” to “98”. Is within the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined, and when within the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA4” is determined. PA2 "is determined. As a result, if the random value MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above ranges), it is easily determined in advance whether it will be reach, super reach, super reach α, or super reach β. can do. Accordingly, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start winning, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. If the random value MR3 is in the range of “0” to “69”, it can be easily determined in advance that at least the reach will not be reached.

  In the case of the example shown in FIG. 9, the ratio (hereinafter referred to as “R1”) at which the variation category “PA3” is determined in each variation in the normal state is (1−P) × (h3 × 0.01). ). The rate at which the variation category “PA4” is determined (hereinafter referred to as “R2”) is (1−P) × (h4 × 0.01). The rate at which the fluctuation category “PA5” is determined (hereinafter referred to as “R3”) is (1−P) × (h5 × 0.01). The rate at which the variation category “PB3” is determined (hereinafter referred to as “R4”) is (P × x × 0.01 × a7 × 0.01) + (P × y × 0.01 × a4 × 0. 01) + (P × z × 0.01 × a1 × 0.01). The rate at which the variation category “PB4” is determined (hereinafter referred to as “R5”) is (P × x × 0.01 × a8 × 0.01) + (P × y × 0.01 × a5 × 0. 01) + (P × z × 0.01 × a2 × 0.01). The rate at which the fluctuation category “PB5” is determined (hereinafter referred to as “R6”) is (P × x × 0.01 × a9 × 0.01) + (P × y × 0.01 × a6 × 0. 01) + (P × z × 0.01 × a3 × 0.01). Therefore, the reliability of “normal reach” (referred to as “R7”) is R4 / (R1 + R4). The reliability of “super reach α” (referred to as “R8”) is R5 / (R2 + R5). The reliability of “super reach β” (referred to as “R9”) is R6 / (R3 + R6).

  Further, the reliability (R9) of “super reach β”> the reliability (R8) of “super reach α”> the reliability (R7) of “normal reach” may be satisfied. That is, the determination ratio (values “h1” to “h5” and “a1” to “a9”) in FIG. )> A determination value may be assigned to each variation category in the variation category determination table so that the reliability (R7) of “normal reach” is satisfied.

  When determination ratios (values of “h1” to “h5” and “a1” to “a9”) differ according to the number of reserved memories (a mode in which a plurality of types of variable category determination tables are prepared according to the number of reserved memories In the case of (1), the reliability of “Super Reach β” (R9)> Reliability of “Super Reach α” (R8)> in all the reserved storage numbers (total reserved storage numbers “1” to “8”)> It is preferable that the reliability is “normal reach” (R7). That is, the above-described determination ratio based on the variable category determination table corresponding to each number of reserved storages is “superreach β” reliability (R9)> “superreach α” reliability (R8)> “normal reach” reliability. It is preferable to assign a determination value to each variation category in the variation category determination table corresponding to each reserved storage number so as to be (R7).

  When the determination ratios (values “h1” to “h5” and “a1” to “a9”) differ according to the number of reserved memories, a part of the reserved memories (total number of reserved memories “1” to “1” 8), the reliability (R9) of “super reach β”> the reliability (R8) of “super reach α”> the reliability (R7) of “normal reach” may be satisfied. That is, the above-described determination ratio according to the variable category determination table corresponding to a specific number of reserved memories is “superreach β” reliability (R9)> “superreach α” reliability (R8)> “normal reach” reliability. A determination value may be assigned to each variation category in the variation category determination table corresponding to the specific reserved storage number so as to be (R7). For example, when the specific number of reserved memories is a representative (typical) total reserved memory number (for example, two), the above-described variable category determination table (2) corresponding to two or three total reserved memory numbers ( "C1-TBL2", "C-TBL12", "C-TBL22", "C-TBL32"), the values of "h1" to "h5" and "a1" to "a9" are "Super Reach β" The above-described variation category determination table (“C-TBL2”, “C-TBL12”) is set so that the reliability (R9)> the reliability (R8) of “super reach α”> the reliability (R7) of “normal reach”. , “C-TBL22”, “C-TBL32”), a determination value may be assigned to each variation category.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the determination ratio of the variation category in the high base state (for example, the high accuracy high base state / accuracy variation state). In FIG. 10, “P” is a jackpot probability in the probability variation state and corresponds to “p3” in FIG. “X”, “y”, and “z” are distributions (rates) of the big hit type at the big hit in the probability variation state, and are the same as “x”, “y”, and “z” in FIG. is there.

  In FIG. 10, “d1” to “d3” are the determination ratios (%) of the variation category at the time of loss in the probability variation state. “D1” is a determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA-T”, “d2” is a determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA-JD”, and “d3” is a determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA-JK”. “D1” + “d2” + “d3” = 100. “L1” and “l2” are the determination rates (%) of the variation category at the time of the third big hit (10R normal) in the probability variation state. “L1” is a determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PB-JL”, and “l2” is a determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PB-KL”. “L1” + “l2” = 100. “W1” is a determination ratio (%) of the variation category (variation category “PB-JW”) at the time of the second big hit (10R probability variation) in the probability variation state. “W1” = 100. “W2” is the determination ratio (%) of the variation category (variation category “PB-KW”) at the time of the first big hit (15R probability variation) in the probability variation state. “W2” = 100.

  In the case of the example shown in FIG. 10, the variation category (variation category “PB-JW”, variation category in which the battle result wins when the probability big hit (first big hit (15R probability variation), second big hit (10R probability variation)) is obtained. “PB-KW” is determined, but when it is a normal big hit (third big hit (10R normal)) or lost, the variation category in which the battle result wins is not determined. If you win, you will win a promising big hit.

  In the case of the example shown in FIG. 10, the variation category (variation category “PB-JL”, variation category “PB-KL) in which the result of the battle is lost when the normal big hit (third big hit (10R normal)) is determined. However, when it is a probable big hit (first big hit (15R positive change), second big hit (10R positive change)) or is lost, the variation category in which the result of the battle is lost is not determined. If you lose, you usually get a big hit.

  In the case of the example shown in FIG. 10, in the case of a loss, a variation category without variation (variation category “PA-T”), a variation category in which the result of the battle is a draw (variation category “PB-JD”, variation category “PB-”). KD) is determined, but if it is big hit (first big hit (15R probability variation), second big hit (10R probability variation), third big hit (10R normal variation)), the battle category without battle and the result of the battle will be a draw The variation category is not determined, that is, if the battle effect is not executed, or if the battle effect is executed and is a draw, the game is lost, and in this embodiment, the probability change state is maintained while the game is lost.

  As in the case of the normal state, the determination rate (“d1” to “d3”) of the variation category at the time of loss in the probability variation state may be a different value depending on the situation (for example, the number of pending storages and the number of variations). The same value may be used regardless of the situation. For example, the determination ratio “d1” of the variation category “PA-T” may be varied according to the total number of reserved memories, or may be always constant in any total number of reserved memories.

  Hereinafter, a mode in which the determination ratios (“d1” to “d3”) of the variation category at the time of the loss are the same value regardless of the situation and the determination ratios (“d1” to “d3”) of the variation category at the time of the loss A description will be given of each aspect of different values depending on the number of reserved memories.

  In the case of a mode in which the determination rate (“d1” to “d3”) of the variation category at the time of loss in the probability variation state is the same value regardless of the situation, the table for reference of the variation category is used as a table to be referred to at the time of loss in the probability variation state. About 100 possible values of random number MR3 (100 from “0” to “99” shown in FIG. 5), d1 is assigned to variation category “PA-T”, and variation category “PA-JD” is assigned. One table may be prepared in which d2 are allocated and d3 are allocated to the variation category “PA-KD” (referred to as a variation category determination table “C-TBL40”).

  When the variation category determination table “C-TBL40” is used as a table that is referenced when the probability variation state is lost, the CPU 103 refers to the variation category determination table “C-TBL40” when the probability variation state is lost, and each variation is determined. By comparing the determination value assigned to the category and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, any one of the variation categories “PA-T”, “PA-JD”, and “PA-KD” is determined. decide.

  On the other hand, in the case of a mode in which the determination rate (“d1” to “d3”) of the variation category at the time of loss in the probability variation state is a different value according to the number of reserved memories, It is only necessary to prepare a plurality of types of variation category determination tables in which at least one of d1 to d3 is different. As an example, a variable category determination table (referred to as a variable category determination table “C-TBL41”) referred to when the total number of reserved memories is one, and is referred when the total number of reserved memories is two or three. Variation category determination table (variation category determination table “C-TBL42”), variation category determination table (referred to as variation category determination table “C-TBL43”) referred to when the total number of reserved storage is 4 to 8 These three types of variation category determination tables may be prepared.

  When the variation category determination tables “C-TBL41” to “C-TBL43” are used as tables to be referred to when the probability variation state is lost, the CPU 103 determines the variation category determination tables “C-TBL41” to “C-TBL41” when the probability variation state is lost. From “C-TBL43”, select any variation category determination table corresponding to the total number of reserved storage, refer to the selected variation category determination table, and determine the determination value assigned to each variation category; By comparing with the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, one of the variation categories “PA-T”, “PA-JD”, and “PA-KD” is determined.

  Similarly, the determination ratio (“l1”, “l2”) of the variation category at the time of the third big hit (10R normal) in the probability variation state may be a different value depending on the situation (for example, the number of pending storages and the number of variations). It may be the same value regardless of the situation. For example, the determination ratio “l1” of the variation category “PB-JL” may be varied according to the total number of reserved memories, or may be always constant in any total number of reserved memories.

  Hereinafter, a mode in which the determination rate (“l1”, “l2”) of the variation category at the third big hit (10R normal) is the same value regardless of the situation, and the variation category at the third big hit (10R normal) A description will be given of each aspect in which the determination ratios (“l1” and “l2”) are set to different values according to the number of reserved memories.

  In the case of a mode in which the change rate (“l1”, “l2”) of the variation category at the third big hit (10R normal) in the probability variation state is the same value regardless of the situation, the third big hit (10R normal) in the probability variation state As a table that is sometimes referred to, for 100 possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, l1 is allocated to the variation category “PB-JL”, and l2 is allocated to the variation category “PB-KL”. One table (variable category determination table “C-TBL50”) may be prepared.

  When the variation category determination table “C-TBL50” is used as a table to be referred to at the time of the third big hit (10R normal) in the probability variation state, the CPU 103 determines the variation category determination table at the third big hit (10R normal) in the probability variation state. By referring to “C-TBL50” and comparing the determination value assigned to each variation category with the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, the variation categories “PB-JL” and “PB” are compared. -KL "is determined.

  On the other hand, in the case of a mode in which the change ratio (“l1”, “l2”) of the variation category at the third big hit (10R normal) in the probability variation state is different depending on the number of reserved storage, the third big hit ( As a table to be referred to at the time of 10R (normal), a plurality of types of variation category determination tables having different l1 and l2 may be prepared. As an example, a variable category determination table (referred to as a variable category determination table “C-TBL51”) that is referred to when the total number of reserved memories is one, and is referred to when the total number of reserved memories is two or three. Variation category determination table (variable category determination table “C-TBL52”), a variation category determination table (referred to as variation category determination table “C-TBL53”) referenced when the total number of reserved storage is 4 to 8 These three types of variation category determination tables may be prepared.

  When the variation category determination tables “C-TBL51” to “C-TBL53” are used as tables to be referenced at the time of the third big hit (10R normal) in the probability variation state, the CPU 103 causes the third big hit (10R normal) in the probability variation state. Sometimes, one of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the total number of reserved storage is selected from the variation category determination tables “C-TBL51” to “C-TBL53”, and the selected variation category determination table is referred to. By comparing the determination value assigned to the fluctuation category and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation category, one of the fluctuation categories “PB-JL” and “PB-KL” is determined.

  As a table to be referred to at the time of the second big hit (10R probability variation) in the probability variation state, for the 100 possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, w1 (100) is included in the variation category “PB-JW”. One allocated table (variable category determination table “C-TBL60”) may be prepared.

  As a table to be referred to at the time of the third big hit (15R probability variation) in the probability variation state, w2 (100) are included in the variation category “PB-KW” for 100 possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. One allocated table (variable category determination table “C-TBL70”) may be prepared.

  In the case of the example shown in FIG. 10, in each variation in the probability variation state, the ratio (hereinafter referred to as “R21”) in which the variation category “PA-JD” is determined is (1−P) × (d2 × 0). .01). The ratio (hereinafter referred to as “R22”) at which the variation category “PA-KD” is determined is (1−P) × (d3 × 0.01). The rate at which the variation category “PB-JL” is determined (hereinafter referred to as “R23”) is P × z × 0.01 × l1 × 0.01. The rate at which the variation category “PB-KL” is determined (hereinafter referred to as “R24”) is P × z × 0.01 × l2 × 0.01. The rate at which the fluctuation category “PB-JW” is determined (hereinafter referred to as “R25”) is P × y × 0.01 × w1 × 0.01. The rate at which the variation category “PB-KW” is determined (hereinafter referred to as “R26”) is P × xx × 0.01 × w2 × 0.01. Therefore, the rate at which the weak enemy battle is determined (hereinafter referred to as “R27”) is R21 + R23 + R25. The ratio at which the strong enemy battle is determined (hereinafter referred to as “R28”) is R22 + R24 + R26. The ratio of losing in the weak enemy battle (hereinafter referred to as “R29”) is R23 / R27. The ratio of losing in the strong enemy battle (hereinafter referred to as “R30”) is R24 / R28. The ratio of winning the weak enemy battle (hereinafter referred to as “R31”) is R25 / R27. The ratio of winning the strong enemy battle (hereinafter referred to as “R32”) is R26 / R28.

  It has been described that the strong enemy battle is a disadvantageous production that is easier to lose than the weak enemy battle. Specifically, the ratio of losing in the strong enemy battle (R30)> the ratio of losing in the weak enemy battle (R29). That is, the ratio (R30) of the determination ratio (values “d1” to “d3”, “l1”, “l2”, “w1”, and “w2”) in FIG. 10 is lost in the strong enemy battle (R29)> The determination value is assigned to each variation category in the variation category determination table. Further, the weak enemy battle has been described as an advantageous effect that is easier to win than the strong enemy battle, but specifically, the ratio of winning in the weak enemy battle (R31)> the ratio of winning in the strong enemy battle (R32). That is, the determination value is assigned to each variable category in the variable category determination table so that the determination ratio is such that the ratio of winning in the weak enemy battle (R31)> the ratio of winning in the strong enemy battle (R32).

  When the determination ratios (values of “d1” to “d3”, “l1”, and “l2”) are different according to the number of reserved memories (a mode in which a plurality of types of variable category determination tables are prepared according to the number of reserved memories) In the case), the ratio of losing in the strong enemy battle (R30)> the ratio of losing in the weak enemy battle (R29) and the weak enemy battle in all the stored memory numbers (total reserved memory numbers “1” to “8”) It is preferable to assign a determination value to each variation category in the variation category determination table corresponding to each number of reserved memories so that the ratio of winning (R31)> the ratio of winning in a strong enemy battle (R32). It should be noted that the variable category determination table “C-TBL60” is referred to regardless of the number of reserved memories when the second big hit (10R probability change), and the variable category determination table “ Reference is made to “C-TBL70”.

  When the determination ratios (values “d1” to “d3” and “l1” and “l2”) differ according to the number of reserved memories, a part of the reserved memories (total reserved memories “1” to “8”). ), The ratio of losing in a strong enemy battle (R30)> the ratio of losing in a weak enemy battle (R29) and the ratio of winning in a weak enemy battle (R31)> the ratio of winning in a strong enemy battle (R32). May be. That is, the ratio determined by the variable category determination table corresponding to a specific number of reserved memories is a ratio of losing in a strong enemy battle (R30)> a ratio of losing in a weak enemy battle (R29), and a ratio of winning in a weak enemy battle (R31). > A determination value may be assigned to each variation category in the variation category determination table corresponding to the specific number of reserved memories so that the ratio of winning in a strong enemy battle (R32) is obtained. For example, when the specific number of reserved memories is a representative (typical) total reserved memory number (for example, two), the above-described variable category determination table (2) corresponding to two or three total reserved memory numbers ( “C1-TBL42”, “C-TBL52”, “C-TBL60”, “C-TBL70”) “d1” to “d3”, “l1” “l2” “w1” “w2” The variable category determination table (“C” is set so that the ratio of losing in the battle (R30)> the ratio of losing in the weak enemy battle (R29) and the ratio of winning in the weak enemy battle (R31)> the ratio of winning in the strong enemy battle (R32). -TBL42 "," C-TBL52 "), a determination value may be assigned to each variation category.

  As described above, the variable category is the current game state (normal state / probable change state), any variable category determination table corresponding to the special figure display result (or any one depending on the number of reserved memories, etc.) (Variable category determination table) and random number MR3 for determining the variable category.

  11 and 12 are explanatory diagrams illustrating the determination ratio of the variation pattern in the low base state. FIG. 11 shows the determination rate (%) of the variation pattern when the variation category of variation (variation category “PA1” to variation category “PA5”) is established. FIG. 11A shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the variation category is “PA1”. FIG. 11B shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the variation category is “PA2”. FIG. 11C shows the variation pattern determination ratio (%) when the variation category is “PA3”. FIG. 11D shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the variation category is “PA4”. FIG. 11E shows the variation pattern determination ratio (%) when the variation category is “PA5”.

  In FIG. 11A, “h11” is the determination ratio of the variation pattern “PA1-1”. “H11” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the variation category is “PA1”, there are 100 possible values (100 from “0” to “99” shown in FIG. 5) of the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern. A fluctuation pattern determination table in which h11 (100) are assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” may be prepared. In FIG. 11B, “h21” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1”, “h22” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2”, and “h23” is the determination of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3”. It is a ratio. “H21” + “h22” + “h23” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the variation category is “PA2”, h21 are assigned to the variation pattern “PA2-1” for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern A variation pattern determination table in which h22 is allocated to “PA2-2” and h23 is allocated to the variation pattern “PA2-3” may be prepared. In FIG. 11C, “h31” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA3-1”, and “h32” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2”. “H31” + “h32” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the variation category is “PA3”, h100 are assigned to the variation pattern “PA3-1” with respect to 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. A variation pattern determination table in which h32 are assigned to “PA3-2” may be prepared. In FIG. 11D, “h41” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1”, “h42” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2”, and “h43” is the determination of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-3”. The ratio, “h44” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-4”, and “h45” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-5”. “H41” + “h42” + “h43” + “h44” + “h45” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the variation category is “PA4”, h41 are assigned to the variation pattern “PA4-1” for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern H42 were assigned to “PA4-2”, h43 were assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PA4-3”, h44 were assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PA4-4”, and h45 were assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PA4-5”. A variation pattern determination table may be prepared. In FIG. 11E, “h51” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA5-1”, “h52” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA5-2”, and “h53” is the determination of the fluctuation pattern “PA5-3”. The ratio, “h54” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA5-4”, and “h55” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA5-5”. “H51” + “h52” + “h53” + “h54” + “h55” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the variation category is “PA5”, h100 are assigned to the variation pattern “PA5-1” with respect to 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern H52 were assigned to “PA5-2”, h53 were assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PA5-3”, h54 were assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PA5-4”, and h55 were assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PA5-5”. A variation pattern determination table may be prepared.

  FIG. 12 shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the variation category (variation category “PB3” to variation category “PB5”) is a big hit. FIG. 12A shows the variation pattern determination ratio (%) when the first big hit (15R probability variation) and the variation category “PB3”. FIG. 12B shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the second big hit (10R probability variation) and the variation category “PB3”. FIG. 12C shows the determination rate (%) of the variation pattern when the third big hit (10R normal) and the variation category “PB3”. FIG. 12D shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the first big hit (15R probability variation) and the variation category “PB4”. FIG. 12E shows the variation pattern determination ratio (%) when the second big hit (10R probability variation) and the variation category “PB4”. FIG. 12F shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the third big hit (10R normal) and the variation category “PB4”. FIG. 12G shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the first big hit (15R probability variation) and the variation category “PB5”. FIG. 12H shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the second big hit (10R probability variation) and the variation category “PB5”. FIG. 12 (I) shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the third big hit (10R normal) and the variation category “PB5”.

  In FIG. 12A, “a71” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB3-1”, and “a72” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2”. “A71” + “a72” = 100. In other words, as a table to be referred to when the first big hit (15R probability variation) and the variation category “PB3”, 100 possible random number values MR5 for determining the variation pattern (from “0” to “0” shown in FIG. 5). For the value “100” of “99”, a variation pattern determination table in which a71 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-1” and a72 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-2” may be prepared. In FIG. 12B, “a41” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB3-1”, and “a42” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2”. “A41” + “a42” = 100. That is, as a table referred to when the second big hit (10R probability variation) and the variation category “PB3”, the variation pattern “PB3- It is only necessary to prepare a variation pattern determination table in which a41 items are assigned to “1” and a42 items are assigned to the variation pattern “PB3-2”. In FIG. 12C, “a11” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB3-1”, and “a12” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2”. “A11” + “a12” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the third big hit (10R normal) and the fluctuation category “PB3”, the fluctuation pattern “PB3- It is only necessary to prepare a variation pattern determination table in which a11 pieces are assigned to “1” and a12 pieces are assigned to the variation pattern “PB3-2”.

  In FIG. 12D, “a81” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-1”, “a82” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-2”, and “a83” is the determination of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-3”. The ratio, “a84” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-4”, and “a85” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-5”. “A81” + “a82” + “a83” + “a84” + “a85” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the first big hit (15R probability variation) and the variation category “PB4”, the variation pattern “PB4−” is obtained for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR5 for variation pattern determination. 1 is assigned to a fluctuation pattern “PB4-2”, a83 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB4-3”, a84 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB4-4”, and the fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is assigned. It is sufficient to prepare a variation pattern determination table in which a85 pieces are assigned to “PB4-5”. In FIG. 12E, “a51” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-1”, “a52” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-2”, and “a53” is the determination of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-3”. The ratio, “a54” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-4”, and “a55” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-5”. “A51” + “a52” + “a53” + “a54” + “a55” = 100. In other words, as a table to be referred to when the second big hit (10R probability variation) and the variation category “PB4”, the variation pattern “PB4−” is obtained for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR5 for variation pattern determination. 1 is assigned to a fluctuation pattern “PB4-2”, a53 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB4-3”, a54 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB4-4”, and the fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is assigned. It is sufficient to prepare a variation pattern determination table in which a55 pieces are assigned to “PB4-5”. In FIG. 12F, “a21” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-1”, “a22” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-2”, and “a23” is the determination of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-3”. The ratio, “a24” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-4”, and “a25” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-5”. “A21” + “a22” + “a23” + “a24” + “a25” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the third big hit (10R normal) and the variation category “PB4”, the variation pattern “PB4−” is obtained with respect to 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR5 for variation pattern determination. A21 is assigned to 1 ”, a22 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern“ PB4-2 ”, a23 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern“ PB4-3 ”, a24 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern“ PB4-4 ”, and the fluctuation pattern“ PB4-4 ”is assigned. It is sufficient to prepare a variation pattern determination table in which a25 pieces are assigned to “PB4-5”.

  In FIG. 12G, “a91” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-1”, “a92” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-2”, and “a93” is the determination of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-3”. The ratio, “a94” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4”, and “a95” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-5”. “A91” + “a92” + “a93” + “a94” + “a95” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the first big hit (15R probability variation) and the variation category “PB5”, the variation pattern “PB5−” is used for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR5 for variation pattern determination. 1 is assigned to a fluctuation pattern “PB5-2”, a93 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB5-3”, a94 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4”, and the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is assigned. A variation pattern determination table in which a95 is assigned to “PB5-5” may be prepared. In FIG. 12H, “a61” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-1”, “a62” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-2”, and “a63” is the determination of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-3”. The ratio, “a64” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4”, and “a65” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-5”. “A61” + “a62” + “a63” + “a64” + “a65” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the second big hit (10R probability variation) and the variation category “PB5”, the variation pattern “PB5- 1 is assigned to 1 ”, a62 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern“ PB5-2 ”, a63 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern“ PB5-3 ”, a64 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern“ PB5-4 ”, and the fluctuation pattern“ PB5-4 ”is assigned. A variation pattern determination table in which a65 is assigned to “PB5-5” may be prepared. In FIG. 12 (I), “a31” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-1”, “a32” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-2”, and “a33” is the determination of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-3”. The ratio, “a34” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4”, and “a35” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-5”. “A31” + “a32” + “a33” + “a34” + “a35” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the third big hit (10R normal) and the fluctuation category “PB5”, the fluctuation pattern “PB5- A31 is assigned to 1 ”, a32 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern“ PB5-2 ”, a33 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern“ PB5-3 ”, a34 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern“ PB5-4 ”. A variation pattern determination table in which a35 pieces are assigned to “PB5-5” may be prepared.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of the variation pattern in the high base state. FIG. 13A to FIG. 13C show determination of a variation pattern when the variation category is a variation category (variation category “PA-T”, variation category “PA-JD”, variation category “PA-KD”). It is a percentage (%). FIG. 13A shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the variation category is “PA-T”. FIG. 13B shows the determination rate (%) of the variation pattern when the variation category is “PA-JD”. FIG. 13C shows the determination rate (%) of the variation pattern when the variation category is “PA-KD”.

  In FIG. 13A, “d11” is a determination ratio of the variation pattern “PA-T1”. “D11” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the variation category is “PA-T”, 100 possible values (100 of “0” to “99” shown in FIG. 5) of the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern can be taken. For the value, a fluctuation pattern determination table in which d1 (100) is assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PA-T1” may be prepared. In FIG. 13B, “d21” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA-JD1”, and “d22” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PA-JD2”. “D21” + “d22” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the variation category is “PA-JD”, d21 are allocated to the variation pattern “PA-JD1” for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. A variation pattern determination table in which d22 elements are allocated to the variation pattern “PA-JD2” may be prepared. The same applies to FIG. 13C.

  FIGS. 13D to 13G show jackpot variation categories (variation category “PB-JL”, variation category “PB-KL”, variation category “PB-JW”, variation category “PB-KW”). This is the determination ratio (%) of the fluctuation pattern when. FIG. 13D shows the variation pattern determination ratio (%) when the variation category is “PB-JL”. FIG. 13E shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the variation category is “PB-KL”. FIG. 13F shows the determination ratio (%) of the variation pattern when the variation category is “PB-JW”. FIG. 13G illustrates the variation pattern determination ratio (%) when the variation category is “PB-KW”.

  In FIG. 13D, “l11” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB-JL1”, and “l12” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB-JL2”. “L11” + “l12” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the variation category is “PB-JL”, 100 possible random number values MR5 for determining the variation pattern (100 from “0” to “99” illustrated in FIG. 5) can be obtained. Regarding the values, it is only necessary to prepare a variation pattern determination table in which 11 1 are allocated to the variation pattern “PA-JL1” and l12 are allocated to the variation pattern “PA-JL2”. In FIG. 13E, “l21” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB-KL1”, and “l22” is the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern “PB-KL2”. “L21” + “l22” = 100. That is, as a table to be referred to when the variation category is “PB-KL”, l21 are assigned to the variation pattern “PA-KL1” for 100 possible determination values of the random value MR5 for variation pattern determination. What is necessary is just to prepare the fluctuation pattern determination table which assigned 122 to the fluctuation pattern "PA-KL2". The same applies to FIGS. 13F and 13G.

  The CPU 103 selects any variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category from among a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables, refers to the selected variation pattern determination table, and is assigned to each variation pattern. Any variation pattern is determined by comparing the determination value and numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern.

  For example, when the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA4”, the variation pattern (variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-5”) is determined at a determination ratio as illustrated in FIG. Select a decision table. Then, the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA4-1” when the numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is one of h41 assigned to the variation pattern “PA4-1”. , When one of the h42 assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2”, the fluctuation category “PA4-2” is determined, and one of the h43 assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PA4-3”. If it is one, the variation category “PA4-3” is determined, and if it is one of h44 assigned to the variation pattern “PA4-4”, the variation category “PA4-4” is determined, and the variation pattern “PA4-4” is determined. When it is one of h45 assigned to “PA4-5”, the variation category “PA4-5” is determined. Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the first big hit (15R probability variation) and also determines the variation category “PB4”, the variation pattern (variation pattern) is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. “PB4-1” to “PB4-5”) are selected. Then, the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PB4-1” when the numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is one of a81 assigned to the variation pattern “PB4-1”. , The variation category “PB4-2” is determined when it is one of a82 allocated to the variation pattern “PB4-2”, and one of a83 allocated to the variation pattern “PB4-3” is determined. If it is one, the variation category “PB4-3” is determined, and if it is one of a84 assigned to the variation pattern “PB4-4”, the variation category “PB4-4” is determined, and the variation pattern “PB4-4” is determined. When it is one of a85 assigned to “PB4-5”, the variation category “PB4-5” is determined.

  Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA-JD”, the variation pattern (variation patterns “PA-JD1” to “PA-JD2”) is determined at a determination ratio as illustrated in FIG. Select the fluctuation pattern determination table. Then, the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA-JD1” when the numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is one of d21 assigned to the variation pattern “PA-JD1”. The variation category “PA-JD2” is determined when it is one of d22 assigned to the variation pattern “PA-JD2”. Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA-JL”, the variation pattern (variation patterns “PB-JL1” to “PB-JL2”) is determined at a determination ratio as illustrated in FIG. Select the fluctuation pattern determination table. Then, the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PB-JL1” when the numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is one of l11 assigned to the variation pattern “PB-JL1”. The variation category “PB-JL2” is determined when it is one of l12 assigned to the variation pattern “PB-JL2”.

  As described above, the variation pattern is determined based on any variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category and the like, and the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern.

  Note that variation patterns (variation patterns “PA3-1”, “PA3-2”, “PB3-1”, “PB3-2”) belonging to the normal reach variation category (variation category “PA3”, variation category “PB3”). In this case, the variation pattern with a long special figure variation time may have a higher degree of jackpot reliability than the short variation pattern. For example, in the case of the normal reach (loss) variation category “PA3”, a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA3-1”) having a short special figure variation time is represented by a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA3”) having a long special diagram variation time. -2 "), and when the fluctuation category is" PB3 "of normal reach (big hit), the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern" PB3-2 ") having a long special figure fluctuation time is It may be more easily determined than a short variation pattern (variation pattern “PB3-1”). As an example, h31 shown in FIG. 11C is “70”, h32 is “30”, h71 shown in FIG. 12A is “10”, h72 is “90”, and FIG. H41 may be “10”, h42 may be “90”, h11 illustrated in FIG. 12C may be “10”, and h12 may be “90”.

  In the fluctuation pattern (variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2”) belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” of normal reach (big hit), the fluctuation pattern with a long special figure fluctuation time is the first big hit compared with the short fluctuation pattern. The degree of expectation of (15R probability variation) may be increased. For example, in the case of the first big hit (15R probability variation), the variation pattern (variation pattern) in which the special figure variation time is longer than in the case of the second big hit (10R probability variation) or the third big hit (10R normal variation). “PB3-2”) may be easily determined, and a variation pattern with a short special figure variation time (variation pattern “PB3-1”) may be difficult to be determined. As an example, h71 shown in FIG. 12A is “5”, h72 is “95”, h41 shown in FIG. 12B is “10”, h42 is “90”, and FIG. H11 may be “20”, and h12 may be “80”.

  In addition, in the variation patterns (variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-5”, variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-5”) belonging to the variation category (PA4, PB4) of super reach α The variation pattern with a long variation time may have higher jackpot reliability than the short variation pattern. For example, when the variation category “PA4” of super reach α (losing) is used, a variation pattern with a short special figure variation time (such as a variation pattern “PA4-1” or “PA4-2”) is represented by a special diagram variation time. Is easier to determine than a long fluctuation pattern (variation patterns “PA4-5”, “PA4-4”, etc.), and if the fluctuation category is “PB4” for super reach α (big hit), the special figure fluctuation time is longer. Fluctuation patterns (variation patterns “PB4-5”, “PB4-4”, etc.) are more easily determined than fluctuation patterns (variation patterns “PB4-1”, “PB4-2”, etc.) with a short special figure fluctuation time. You may do it. As an example, h41 shown in FIG. 11D is “50”, h42 is “30”, h43 is “14”, h44 is “4”, and h45 is “2”, which is shown in FIG. h81 is “15”, h82 is “15”, h83 is “20”, h84 is “25”, h85 is “25”, h51 shown in FIG. 12E is “15”, and h52 is “15”. , H53 is “20”, h54 is “25”, h55 is “25”, h21 shown in FIG. 12F is “15”, h22 is “15”, h23 is “20”, and h24 is “25”. ”And h25 may be“ 25 ”.

  In the variation pattern (variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-5”) belonging to the variation category “PB4” of the super reach α (big hit), the variation pattern with the longer special figure variation time is compared with the shorter variation pattern. You may make it the expectation degree which becomes the 1st big hit (15R probability change) etc. become high. For example, in the case of the first big hit (15R probability variation), compared to the case of the second big hit (10R probability variation) or the third big hit (10R normal variation), the variation pattern (variation) Pattern "PB4-5", "PB4-4", etc.) are easily determined, and it is difficult to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern "PB4-1", "PB4-2", etc.) with a short special figure variation time. Also good. As an example, h81 shown in FIG. 12D is “10”, h82 is “10”, h83 is “20”, h84 is “30”, and h85 is “30”, as shown in FIG. h51 is “15”, h52 is “15”, h53 is “20”, h54 is “25”, h55 is “25”, h21 shown in FIG. 12F is “20”, and h22 is “20”. , H23 may be “20”, h24 may be “20”, and h25 may be “20”.

  Similarly, in the variation patterns (variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-5”, variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-5”) belonging to the variation category (PA5, PB5) of super reach β. The variation pattern with a longer diagram variation time may have a higher reliability for the big hit than the shorter variation pattern. In the variation pattern (variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-5”) belonging to the variation category “PB5” of the super reach β (big hit), the variation pattern having a longer special figure variation time becomes a shorter variation pattern. In comparison, the expectation level such as the first big hit (15R probability variation) may be increased.

  Similarly to the above-described variation pattern in the normal state (low base state), the variation pattern in the probability variation state (high base state) also depends on the length of the special figure variation time even if the variation pattern belongs to the same variation category. The reliability of the jackpot and the degree of expectation for the first jackpot (15R probability change) may be varied.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 14 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 14 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a hold specific information storage unit 151C, a general figure hold storage unit 151D, and a game. A control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. On-hold data (first on-hold information) of a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random values extracted from the circuit 104 or the like (for example, numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3) is stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). To do.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B has a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. The game ball passes through the hold data (second hold information) of the second special symbol display device 4B in the second special symbol display device 4B) and the third start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6C. Hold data (second hold information) of a special game (special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has entered (entered) and has received a third start prize but has not yet started Remember. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning port (or the third starting winning port) and passes the game ball ( Numerical data indicating random values (for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3) extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 on the basis of the entry) is reserved data, and the number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4)) until it is reached.

  The holding specific information storage unit 151C is in the winning order of the entire holding data including the holding data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A and the holding data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B ( In association with the hold number which is the detection order of the game balls), the hold data based on the occurrence of the first start winning (first hold information), or the hold data based on the occurrence of the second start winning or the third start winning ( (Second hold information) is stored. In the hold specific information storage unit 151C illustrated in FIG. 14, “first” indicates that it is first hold information, and “second” indicates that it is second hold information.

  In addition, in the case of the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, and the hold specific information storage unit 151C shown in FIG. 14 as a whole, five pieces of reservation data (the total number of reserved storages is five) However, the winning order is determined based on the hold data based on the establishment of the first start condition (the hold data with the random number MR1 being “19”) and the hold data based on the establishment of the second start condition (the random number MR1). Holding data with a value of “81”), holding data based on the establishment of the first starting condition (holding data with a random number value MR1 of “22832”), holding data based on the establishment of the second starting condition (of the random value MR1) The value is “52679”, the hold data based on the establishment of the first start condition (the hold data whose random value MR1 is “6104”).

  The first holding information based on the establishment of the first start condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the first start winning opening, and the game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning opening or the third start winning opening. ), The second hold information based on the establishment of the second start prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The usual figure holding storage unit 151 </ b> D stores the holding information of the usual figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the universal figure storage unit 151D determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. For example, the ROM 121 stores various determination tables that are referred to in order to determine the presence / absence of various effects and the contents of effects.

  In addition, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations performed by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the effect model). Data to be stored is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. It consists of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as effect operations in symbol variable display operations, reach effects, re-lottery effects, etc., or various effect operations not accompanied by variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 15A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120 when a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. For example, depending on the display control data, the display mode of variable display of decorative symbols (display position, display size, display start, display end, movement, transparency, etc.) and the display mode of displays other than decorative symbols (display position, display size) Display start, display end, movement, transparency, etc.). Note that the transmittance (also referred to as transmittance) can be controlled in the range of 0% (non-transmission) to 100% (complete transmission). When the transparency of an image is set to 0%, the back of the image cannot be completely seen. When the transparency of an image is 100%, the back of the image is completely visible (the image itself is not completely visible). The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 15B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed on the image display device 5 in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value. While being displayed on the screen, control is performed to display effect images other than decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 in a manner specified by display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value.

  For example, an effect control pattern including character image data A for displaying the character a as an effect image, display control data designating the display operation of the character a, and an effect control process timer determination value corresponding to the timing of the display operation Is stored (prepared) in the ROM 121 in advance, and the character a is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 by setting the effect control pattern as a use pattern.

  Further, a character image (character image data) B-1 for displaying the character b in the first color, and a character b (character b displayed based on the character image data B-1) on the character image B-1. ) And the character image (character image data) B-2 for displaying the character b in the second color different from the first color and the same shape and size, and the character image B-1 The character images B-1 and B-2 are arranged (displayed) on the same display area so that the position of the character b of the character b and the position of the character b on the character image B-2 completely overlap, and An effect control pattern for changing the transparency of a character image (for example, character image B-1) arranged on the front side over time is stored (prepared) in ROM 121 in advance. It can, by setting the performance control pattern as usage patterns, can also be changed over time the color of the character b.

  For example, the character image B-1 is superimposed on the front surface of the character image B-2 so that the position of the character b on the character image B-1 and the position of the character b on the character image B-2 completely overlap each other. (Character image B-1 is arranged on the front surface side and character image B-2 is arranged on the back surface side), and the transparency of character image B-1 arranged on the front surface side over time An effect control pattern is prepared, including display control data for gradually changing from 0% (non-transparent) to 100% (completely transparent), an effect control process timer judgment value according to the timing, and the like. By setting the control pattern as a use pattern, the color of the character b is changed from the first color based on the character image B-1 to the second color based on the character image B-2. It can be smoothly changed.

  Alternatively, the character image B-1 is superimposed on the front surface of the character image B-2 so that the position of the character b on the character image B-1 and the position of the character b on the character image B-2 completely overlap each other. In addition, according to the display control data, the timing, etc., which gradually changes the transparency of the character image B-1 disposed on the front side from 100% (complete transmission) to 0% (non-transmission) over time. By preparing an effect control pattern including an effect control process timer determination value and setting the effect control pattern as a use pattern, the color of the character b is changed from the second color by the character image B-2 to the character. It is possible to smoothly change to the first color by the image B-1.

  Details of specific examples will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data. In the effective period, control for receiving the operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and determining the production content is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 15B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, and the like) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the movable member provided in the production model is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 16A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of the multiple types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. The receiving command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number. When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening or the third starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening prize designation command or second starting opening prize designation command), design A set of four commands: a designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command) is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Is done. In the start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and pending storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the start winning reception command buffer 194A. At the time of starting winning a prize, command transmission is performed in the order of a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. Accordingly, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 16B, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. The category command and the stored memory number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 16B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”.

  The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 16B is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) each time variable symbol display is started. Is deleted from the stored contents, and the stored contents thereafter are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 16B, when a variable display of a new decorative design is started, each command stored in the buffer number “1” is deleted, and the command corresponding to the buffer number “2” is deleted. Each command stored in the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “3” to “4” is changed to the buffer number. Shifted to an area corresponding to “2” and “3”.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the prefetch notice buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 16C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The prefetch notice buffer 194B is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A. In other words, in the prefetching notice buffer 194B, the contents of determination regarding the prefetching notice effects relating to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. . When reserved data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 16B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the notice buffer 194B, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Also, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is changed to another buffer number in the start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted, the contents associated with the buffer number in the prefetch notice buffer 194B are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 17 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B, the third start port switch 22C, and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (steps). S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning time process executed in steps S208, S211 and S214 of FIG. FIG. 21A is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number determination process executed in step S306 of FIG.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is ON (step S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first start opening switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), After the processing of step S209 is executed, the second start port switch 22B is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6B. It is determined whether or not it is on (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S203; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding storage number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  When the second start port switch 22B is OFF in step S203 (step S203; No), or when the second special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; Yes), After the processing of step S212 is executed, the third start port switch 22C is based on the detection signal from the third start port switch 22C provided corresponding to the third start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6C. It is determined whether or not is on (step S205). At this time, if the third start port switch 22C is on (step S205; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S206). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding storage number is not the upper limit value in step S206 (step S206; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S213).

  After executing the process of step S207, the start winning time process (FIG. 20) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S209), and the process of step S203 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S210, the start winning time process (FIG. 20) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S212), and the process of step S205 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S213, the start winning process (FIG. 20) is executed (step S214), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S215), and the start winning determination process is performed. Exit. As a result, even if any two or more of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the third start port switch 22C detect the start winning of the game ball at the same time, they are based on the respective detections. Processing can be completed.

  As the start winning process (steps S208, S211, and S214), the CPU 103 updates the special figure holding storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, by one (step S301). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening or the third starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. . Subsequent to the processing in step S301, the total pending storage number is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S302). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the processing of step S302, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S303). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S304). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S304, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S305). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 17 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  Following the process of step S305, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S306). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S307). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S306), the CPU 103 identifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, by confirming the state of the probability variation flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152 or the like. (Step S401 in FIG. 21A). The CPU 103 may identify the normal state when the probability variation flag is off, and identify the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S401, the CPU 103 selects a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the gaming state from a plurality of special figure display result determination tables (step S402). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the special figure display result determination table in FIG. 8A is selected. Further, for example, when the gaming state is a probable change state, the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8B is selected.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S402, the CPU 103 converts the special figure display result determination table selected in step S402 and numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S303 of FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403). Specifically, the above-described special figure display result determination is performed within a predetermined jackpot determination range (the range of determination values assigned to the special figure display result “big hit”) in the special figure display result determination table selected in step S402. It is determined whether there is numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for use. The CPU 103 may perform the above determination by comparing the minimum value (lower limit value) or the maximum value (upper limit value) of the jackpot determination range with the above-described numerical data, or may determine each determination value within the jackpot determination range. The determination may be made by comparing with the numerical data described above. The same applies to other determinations such as determination of jackpot type.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” as in the process of step S403. That is, within the predetermined small hit determination range (the range of determination values assigned to the special figure display result “small hit”) in the special figure display result determination table selected in step S402, It is determined whether there is numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 (step S404).

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” is sent to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission are performed (step S405). It should be noted that even if there is no small hit determination range in the special figure display result determination table selected in step S401, it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range. If it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is given to the effect control board 12. Are set for transmission (step S407).

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined (step S409). In the process of step S409, the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8C is selected, and numerical data indicating the selected jackpot type determination table and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type extracted in step S303 of FIG. Based on the above, it is determined whether the big hit type is “first big hit”, “second big hit”, or “third big hit”. Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result by the process of step S409 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S410).

  After executing any of the processes in steps S405, S407, and S410, the variation category is determined (step S412). Hereinafter, the process of step S412 will be described in detail. Note that the ROM 101 stores, as a table to be referred to when a loss occurs in a low base state (for example, a low probability low base state / normal state), a variation category determination table (variation Category determination table “C-TBL1”), variable category determination table (variable category determination table “C-TBL2”) referred to when the total number of reserved memories is two or three, and the total number of reserved memories Three types of variation category determination tables (variation category determination table “C-TBL3”) referred to when there are four to eight are stored. When the low base state is lost, the variation category determination table “ From among “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3”, any variable category determination table corresponding to the total number of reserved storages. Reference is made to the Le. In addition, the ROM 101 includes a variation category determination table that is referred to when the total number of pending storages is 1 to 8 as a variation category determination table that is referred to when the first big hit (15R probability change) in the low base state. (Variation category determination table “C-TBL30”) is stored, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL30” is referred to at the time of the first big hit (15R probability variation) in the low base state. In addition, the ROM 101 includes a variation category determination table that is referred to when the total number of pending storages is 1 to 8, as a variation category determination table that is referred to when the second big hit (10R probability change) in the low base state. (Variation category determination table “C-TBL20”) is stored, and when the second big hit (10R probability variation) in the low base state, the variation category determination table “C-TBL20” is referred to. In addition, the ROM 101 has a variable category determination table that is referred to when the total number of pending storages is 1 to 8, as a variable category determination table that is referred to in the third big hit (10R normal) in the low base state. (Variation category determination table “C-TBL10”) is stored, and when the third big hit (10R normal) in the low base state, the variation category determination table “C-TBL10” is referred to. Further, the ROM 101 has a variation that is referred to when the total number of reserved storages is any one of 1 to 8 as a table that is referred to when a loss occurs in a high base state (for example, a highly accurate high base state / accurate change state). The category determination table (variable category determination table “C-TBL40”) is stored, and when the high base state is lost, the variation category determination table “C-TBL40” is referred to. In addition, the ROM 101 has a variable category determination table (variable category) that is referred to when the total number of pending storages is 1 to 8 as a table that is referred to when the first big hit (15R probability change) in the high base state. The determination table “C-TBL70”) is stored, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL70” is referred to at the time of the first big hit (15R probability change) in the high base state. In addition, the ROM 101 includes a variable category determination table (variable category) that is referred to when the total number of reserved storage is 1 to 8, as a table that is referred to when the second big hit (10R probability change) in the high base state. The determination table “C-TBL60”) is stored, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL60” is referred to at the time of the second big hit (10R probability change) in the high base state. In addition, the ROM 101 includes a variable category determination table (variable category) that is referred to when the total number of reserved storage is 1 to 8, as a table that is referred to in the third big hit (10R normal) in the high base state. The determination table “C-TBL50”) is stored, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL50” is referred to at the time of the third big hit (10R normal) in the high base state.

  When the current gaming state is the normal state (when the current gaming state is identified as the normal state in step S401) and when it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” ( In step S <b> 404; No), the CPU 103 reads the total pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 14, and from among a plurality of types of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101, One of the variation category determination tables (any one of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” to the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”) corresponding to the total number of reserved memories is selected. The CPU 103 refers to the selected variation category determination table, determines the determination value assigned to each variation category (variation categories “PA1”, “PA2”, “PA3”, “PA4”, “PA5”), and step S303 in FIG. Is compared (determined) with one of the fluctuation categories “PA1”, “PA2”, “PA3”, “PA4”, and “PA5”. .

  When the current gaming state is a normal state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “first big hit (15R probability change)” (Step S409), the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL30” from the plurality of types of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101. The CPU 103 refers to the selected variation category determination table “C-TBL30”, determines the determination values assigned to the respective variation categories (variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, “PB5”), and the process in step S303 in FIG. Any one of the fluctuation categories “PB3”, “PB4” and “PB5” is determined (determined) by comparing with the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category extracted in this way.

  When the current gaming state is the normal state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “second big hit (10R probability change)” (Step S409), the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL20” from the plurality of types of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101. The CPU 103 refers to the selected variation category determination table “C-TBL20”, determines the determination values assigned to the respective variation categories (variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, “PB5”), and the process in step S303 in FIG. Any one of the fluctuation categories “PB3”, “PB4” and “PB5” is determined (determined) by comparing with the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category extracted in this way.

  When the current gaming state is a normal state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “third big hit (10R normal)” (Step S409), the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL10” from the plurality of types of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101. The CPU 103 refers to the selected variation category determination table “C-TBL10”, determines the determination values assigned to the respective variation categories (variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, “PB5”), and the processing in step S303 in FIG. Any one of the fluctuation categories “PB3”, “PB4” and “PB5” is determined (determined) by comparing with the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category extracted in this way.

  When the current game state is a probability change state (when the current game state is identified as a probability change state in step S401), and when it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” ( In step S404; No), the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL40” from the plurality of types of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101. The CPU 103 refers to the selected variation category determination table “C-TBL40”, determines a determination value assigned to each variation category (variation categories “PA-T”, “PA-JD”, “PA-KD”), By comparing with the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S303 in FIG. 20, any one of the variation categories “PA-T”, “PA-JD”, and “PA-KD” is determined. Determine (determine).

  When the current gaming state is a probable change state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “first big hit (15R probability change)” (Step S409), the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL70” from the plurality of types of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101. The CPU 103 determines (determines) the variation category “PB-KW” with reference to the selected variation category determination table “C-TBL70”. Note that, according to FIG. 10, when “first big hit (15R probability variation)”, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S303 in FIG. 20 is any value. Also, the variation category “PB-KW” is determined.

  When the current gaming state is a probable change state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “second big hit (10R probability change)” (Step S409), the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL60” from the plurality of types of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101. The CPU 103 determines (determines) the variation category “PB-JW” with reference to the selected variation category determination table “C-TBL60”. Note that, according to FIG. 10, when the second big hit (10R probability variation), the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S303 in FIG. The variation category “PB-JW” is determined.

  When the current gaming state is a probable change state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “third big hit (10R normal)” (Step S409), the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL50” from the plurality of types of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101. The CPU 103 refers to the selected variation category determination table “C-TBL50”, determines the determination value assigned to each variation category (variation categories “PB-JL” and “PB-KL”), and step S303 in FIG. By comparing with the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step 1, one of the variation categories “PB-JL” and “PB-KL” is determined (determined).

  Then, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S412 to the effect control board 12 (step S413), the random number determination at the time of winning The process ends. Specifically, transmission of a variation category command corresponding to the variation category determined in the process of step S412 is set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21B, different EXT data is set for each of the variation categories (“PA1” to “PA5”, “PB3” to “PB5”) that can be determined in the normal state. . Although illustration is omitted, variation categories (“PA-T”, “PA-JD”, “PA-KD”, “PB-JL”, “PB-KL”, “PB-”) that can be determined in the probability variation state. Different EXT data is set for each of “JW” and “PB-KW”).

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 18, the CPU 103 selects any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decoration symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Done. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types, a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification. A transmission setting process for transmitting commands and the like is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The variation pattern setting process will be described later.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. The first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol game (special game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether the game is a graphic game). Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 only needs to be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B changes the special symbol based on the value of the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Is included, and a setting for stopping and displaying (deriving) a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol is included. For example, when the big hit flag is on, a big hit start production waiting time is set, and a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 is performed. Thereafter, the big hit flag is updated to OFF (cleared), and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. When the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, a small hit start stage effect waiting time is set, and a hit start designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Settings for sending are made. Thereafter, the small hit flag is updated to OFF (cleared), and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. In addition, when control (for example, control of the number of STs and the number of time reductions, etc.) which changes a game state according to the number of special figure games is required, in the special symbol stop process, the game control counter setting part 154 is performed. The gaming value may be controlled by subtracting 1 (or adding 1) from the count value of a predetermined counter provided in.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, a setting corresponding to the jackpot type may be made. For example, during the execution of the “3rd big hit” round, the prize winning door (or the specific member) is controlled so that the game ball cannot pass (enter) into the specific member or is difficult to pass (enter) ( For example, a period during which the grand prize winning opening is opened) is set so that the game ball can pass (enter) a specific member during the execution of the “first big hit” or “second big hit” round (or pass ( The special winning opening door (or specific member) is controlled so that it is easy to enter. As a result, if the player is playing as instructed, if the jackpot type is “third jackpot”, it will be “big jackpot” of “non-probable change” and the jackpot type will be “first jackpot” or “second jackpot” "Is a" big hit "of" probability change ". When the big hit release pre-processing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, various settings are made to wait until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect is executed, and to start the probability change control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. The processing to perform is included. In the present embodiment, when the big hit type of the current “big hit” determined from the big hit type buffer value is “first big hit (15R positive variation)” or “second big hit (10R positive variation)”, the probability variation flag Is updated to ON (probability change state) (when it is originally ON, it remains ON), and when the big hit type of this “big hit” is “third big hit (10R normal)”, the probability change flag is It is updated to off (non-probability change state) (originally, it remains off when it is off). Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is the same as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Setting to “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening to “15 times” may be performed so that the small hit gaming state is set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process waits until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the lamp 9. Processing to be included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the probability variation flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the total number of reserved memories is “0” (step S230). For example, in the process of step S230, the total pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the total number of reserved memories is other than “0” in step S230 (step S230; No), it is determined whether or not the first held data (first held data) is the second held information. Determination is made (step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, it is determined whether or not the information stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the hold specifying information storage unit 151C is information indicating that the hold information is the second hold information. What is necessary is just to judge.

  When the hold data digested first in step S231 is the second hold information (step S231; Yes), the hold stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). In the process of step S233, the information stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the hold specific information storage unit 151C is shifted up by one entry. Also, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 updates the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter by one. Subsequent to the processing in step S233, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the hold data first digested in step S231 is not the second hold information (step S231; No), the hold data stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. (Step S237). In the process of step S237, the information stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the hold specific information storage unit 151C is shifted up by one entry. Also, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 updates the total reserved memory number count value stored in the total reserved memory number counter by one. Following the processing of step S237, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S234 and S238, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the game state is selected as in the process in step S402 shown in FIG. 21A (step S239). Following the process of step S239, a special figure display result is determined (step S240). For example, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result within the determination range of any special figure display result in the special figure display result determination table selected in the process of step S239 (read out in step S232, What is necessary is just to determine whether there is numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the fluctuation random number buffer, and determining the special figure display result.

  After the special figure display result is determined in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (step S242). Subsequently, as in the process of step S409 shown in FIG. 21A, a jackpot type determination table corresponding to a variation special chart is selected from a plurality of jackpot type determination tables. Select (step S243). Note that, as a variable special figure, the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”) is used in the process of step S409 shown in FIG. 21A, but in the process of step S243, the variable special figure is specified. The buffer value (“1” or “2”) is used. However, in the case of this embodiment, the big hit type determination table of FIG. 8C is selected regardless of whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. Subsequent to the process of step S243, the jackpot type is determined in the same manner as the process of step S409 shown in FIG. 21A (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type determined in step S245 is “third jackpot” leading to “non-probable change”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0”, and the jackpot type determined in step S245 is “probable change”. Is a big hit type buffer value "1", and if the big hit type determined in step S245 is a "second big hit" leading to "probability change" The type buffer value may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  When it is determined in step S246 that it is not “small hit” (step S246; No), or after executing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, the special figure display determined in the process in step S240. In the case of a big hit, a confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the big hit type determined in step S244 (step S248). After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

  When the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S230 (step S230; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S250), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 determines the variation category, similarly to step S412 shown in FIG. 21A (step S261). In the process of step S261, the CPU 103 has already been extracted at the time of winning (step S303 in FIG. 20), and stored as hold data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A (or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B). The variation category may be determined using the random number MR3 for determining the variation category. In addition, when determining the variation category using any variation category determination table corresponding to the number of reserved memories (for example, when the current gaming state is a normal state and loses), the CPU 103 A variable category determination table corresponding to the number of reserved storage at the time of execution of the process of step S261 is selected.

  Note that, as described above, when there is a determination value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same variation category in any of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the number of reserved memories, it corresponds to the same variation category. When the random number MR3 that matches the determination value is extracted at the time of winning a prize, the number of reserved memories is different between when the winning random number determination process (step S306) is executed and when the variation pattern setting process (step S111) is executed. Even if they are greatly different, the variation pattern setting process determines the same variation category as the winning random number determination process. For example, in the specific examples of the variable category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” described above, if the random value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, “99”, the winning is won regardless of the number of reserved memories. The fluctuation category “PA5” is determined in both the random time value determination process and the fluctuation pattern setting process. Also, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, for example, the variation category “PA4” regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing. Is determined. In the process of step S261, it is preferable to determine the variation category using the variation category determination random value MR3 stored as the pending data, but the CPU 103 newly determines the variation category determination random value. MR3 may be extracted and the variation category may be determined using the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category.

  Subsequent to the process of step S261, a variation pattern corresponding to the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is determined (step S262). In the process of step S262, the CPU 103 first selects one of the variation pattern determination tables from a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101.

  Specifically, when the variation category “PA1” is determined in step S261, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (the variation pattern “PA1-1”) at a determination rate as illustrated in FIG. Select the fluctuation pattern determination table. That is, for 100 possible values (100 from “0” to “99” shown in FIG. 5) of the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, h11 (100) in the variation pattern “PA1-1”. The variation pattern determination table to which is assigned is selected. If the variation category “PA2” is determined in step S261, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”) at a determination rate as illustrated in FIG. The variation pattern determination table for which is determined is selected. That is, for the 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, h21 are allocated to the variation pattern “PA2-1”, h22 are allocated to the variation pattern “PA2-2”, and the variation pattern “PA2” is allocated. -3 ”is selected a variation pattern determination table in which h23 are assigned. Similarly, when the variation category “PA3” is determined in step S261, variation patterns (variation patterns “PA3-1” to “PA3-2”) are determined at a determination ratio as illustrated in FIG. If the variation category “PA4” is determined in step S261, the variation patterns (variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-1” are determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11D). PA4-5 ") is selected, and if the fluctuation category" PA5 "is determined in step S261, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern) is determined at a decision rate as shown in FIG. The variation pattern determination table in which “PA5-1” to “PA5-5”) is determined is selected.

  Further, when the first big hit (15R probability variation) is determined in step S244 (that is, when “1” indicating “first big hit” is stored in the big hit type buffer value), and step S261. When the variation category “PB3” is determined in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (variation patterns “PB3-1” to “PB3-2”) at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. Select the variation pattern determination table. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table in which a71 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-1” and a72 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-2”. Select. Further, when the second big hit (10R probability change) is determined in step S244 (that is, when “2” indicating “second big hit” is stored in the big hit type buffer value), and step S261. When the variation category “PB3” is determined in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (variation patterns “PB3-1” to “PB3-2”) at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. Select the variation pattern determination table. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table in which a41 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-1” and a42 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-2”. Select. Further, when the third big hit (10R normal) is determined in step S244 (that is, when “0” indicating “third big hit” is stored in the big hit type buffer value), and in step S261. When the variation category “PB3” is determined in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 determines the variation patterns (variation patterns “PB3-1” to “PB3-2”) at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. Select the variation pattern determination table. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table in which a11 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-1” and a12 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-2”. Select.

  Similarly, when the first big hit (15R probability variation) is determined in step S244 and the variation category “PB4” is determined in step S261, the determination as shown in FIG. When the variation pattern determination table in which the variation patterns (variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-5”) are determined by the ratio is selected, and the second big hit (10R probability variation) is determined in step S244, When the variation category “PB4” is determined in step S261, variation patterns (variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-5”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. And the third big hit (10R normal) is determined in step S244, and the step When the variation category “PB4” is determined in S261, the variation pattern (variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-5”) is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. When the determination table is selected and the first big hit (15R probability variation) is determined in step S244, and the variation category “PB5” is determined in step S261, it is shown in FIG. When a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-5”) are determined at such a determination ratio is selected, and the second big hit (10R probability variation) is determined in step S244. If the variation category “PB5” is determined in step S261, the determination ratio as shown in FIG. A variation pattern determination table for determining variation patterns (variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-5”) is selected, the third big hit (10R normal) is determined in step S244, and the variation category is determined in step S261. When “PB5” is determined, a variation pattern determination table is selected in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-5”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. To do.

  When the variation category “PA-T” is determined in step S261, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA-T1”) at a determination rate as illustrated in FIG. Select the variation pattern determination table. That is, for 100 possible values of the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern determination table in which d11 (100) are allocated to the variation pattern “PA-T1” is selected. When the variation category “PA-JD” is determined in step S261, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (variation patterns “PA-JD1” to “PA-JD2” at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 13B). “)” Is selected. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table in which d21 is allocated to the variation pattern “PA-JD1” and d22 is allocated to the variation pattern “PA-JD2”. Select. Similarly, when the variation category “PA-KD” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (variation patterns “PA-KD1” to “PA-KD2”) is determined at a rate determined as shown in FIG. The variation pattern determination table for which is determined is selected.

  When the variation category “PB-JL” is determined in step S261, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (variation patterns “PB-JL1” to “PB-JL2” at the determination ratio as illustrated in FIG. “)” Is selected. That is, for 100 possible values of the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table in which l11 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB-JL1” and l12 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB-JL2”. select. When the variation category “PB-KL” is determined in step S261, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (variation patterns “PB-KL1” to “PB-KL2” at the determination ratio as illustrated in FIG. “)” Is selected. That is, for the 100 possible values of the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table in which l21 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB-KL1” and l22 is allocated to the variation pattern “PB-KL2”. select. Similarly, when the variation category “PB-JW” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (variation patterns “PB-JW1” to “PB-JW2”) is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. When the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation category “PB-KW” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (variation pattern “PB−” is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13G. KW1 ”to“ PB-KW2 ”) are selected.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, and selects it as described above. Any variation pattern is determined by determining whether there is numerical data indicating the extracted random number MR5 for variation pattern in the variation pattern determination range in the variation pattern determination table.

  Then, the special figure fluctuation time according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S262 is set (step S263). Thereafter, a setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed so as to start either the first special figure game or the second special figure game in accordance with the variable special figure designation buffer value (step S264). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

After the process of step S264 is performed, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol variable display are performed (step S265). The various commands set in this way are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. . Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step S266), and then the variation pattern setting processing is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 24 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, for example, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model. With respect to the control content of the effect operation using, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S74 of FIG. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; No), the command analysis processing is terminated.

  If there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). If it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; Yes), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If it is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; No), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; Yes), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; Yes), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509, and S511. After executing any of the above processes, the received command is stored at the head of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 194A (step S512), and the process returns to the step S501.

  In addition, when the pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with the variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command), the retention storage is performed. The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the start winning receiving command buffer 194A.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; No), after making settings according to other received commands (step S513), the process returns to step S501.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. The reserved memory number notification command and the start opening winning designation command are also referred to as reserved memory information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information. Note that when receiving commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the start winning reception command buffer 194A, the received command is any one of a start opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. May be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S75 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the winning effect determining process executed in step S150 of FIG.

  In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (step S151), and uses the first start opening winning designation command as a new received command. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not any received command of the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152). When it is determined in step S151 that a new received command has not been received (step S152; No), the winning effect determining process is terminated. When a start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command) is received, as shown in FIG. 13B, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, A pending storage number notification command is also received.

  When it is determined in step S151 that a new reception command has been received (step S152; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a hold display mode determination process (details will be described later) for determining the display mode of the hold display. Execute (step S162). After executing the hold display mode determination process, the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold addition process (step S163). In the hold addition process in step S163, the display contents of the hold display stored in association with the buffer content of the pre-read notice buffer 194B corresponding to the winning buffer number in the hold display form determination process (step S162) Is added to the start winning storage display area 5H. For example, the display mode of the hold display to be added to the start winning memory display area 5H is set as the use pattern of the effect control pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is displayed. A hold display is added to the start winning memory display area 5H by transmitting the data to the VDP of the unit 123 or the like. Then, the winning effect determination process (step S150) ends.

  The hold display mode determination process in step S162 will be described. As a method of determining the display mode of the hold display, in the hold display mode determination process in step S162, the display mode is determined based on the variation category specified by the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11. The ROM 121 has a determination value (random number MR6 for display mode determination) assigned to at least one display mode among a plurality of types of display modes of the hold display as a table to be referred to when determining the display mode of the hold display. A plurality of types of hold display mode determination tables are stored, which are different in the number (not shown) and the numerical value to be compared. For example, the ROM 121 stores the following ten types of hold display mode determination tables (variable category determination tables “H-TBL1” to “H-TBL10”, all not shown) as an example. The random number value MR6 for determining the display mode is assumed to take 100 values (100 types of numerical values) from “0” to “99”, for example.

  In the variation category determination table “H-TBL1”, 98 determination values ranging from “0” to “97” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (white)”, and the display mode “sphere (blue)” is set to “ Two determination values in the range of “98” to “99” are assigned. In the variation category determination table “H-TBL2”, 90 determination values ranging from “0” to “89” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (white)”, and the display mode “sphere (blue)” is set to “ Nine determination values in the range of “90” to “98” are assigned, and one determination value of “99” is assigned to the display mode “sphere (red)”. In the variation category determination table “H-TBL3”, 50 determination values in the range of “0” to “49” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (white)”, and the display mode “sphere (blue)” is “ Forty determination values in the range of “50” to “89” are assigned, and ten determination values in the range of “90” to “99” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (red)”. In the variation category determination table “H-TBL4”, 30 determination values in the range of “0” to “29” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (white)”, and the display mode “sphere (blue)” is set to “ 50 determination values in the range of “30” to “79” are assigned, and 20 determination values in the range of “80” to “99” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (red)”. In the variation category determination table “H-TBL5”, 40 determination values ranging from “0” to “39” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (white)”, and the display mode “sphere (blue)” is set to “ 55 judgment values in the range of “40” to “94” are assigned, and five judgment values in the range of “95” to “99” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (red)”. In the variation category determination table “H-TBL6”, 20 determination values in the range of “0” to “19” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (white)”, and the display mode “sphere (blue)” is set to “ Forty determination values in the range of “20” to “59” are assigned, and forty indication values in the range of “60” to “99” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (red)”. In the variation category determination table “H-TBL7”, five determination values in the range of “0” to “4” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (white)”, and the display mode “sphere (blue)” is “ 35 determination values in the range of “5” to “39” are assigned, and 60 determination values in the range of “40” to “99” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (red)”. In the variation category determination table “H-TBL8”, 90 determination values ranging from “0” to “89” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (white)”, and “90” is set to the display mode “sword”. 9 determination values in the range of “98” are assigned, and one determination value in the range of “98” to “99” is assigned to the display mode “sword type (large)”. In the variation category determination table “H-TBL9”, 50 determination values ranging from “0” to “49” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (white)”, and the display mode “sword shape (small)”. Forty determination values in the range of “50” to “89” are assigned, and ten determination values in the range of “90” to “99” are assigned to the display mode “sword type (large)”. In the variation category determination table “H-TBL10”, 50 determination values ranging from “0” to “49” are assigned to the display mode “sphere (white)”, and the display mode “sword shape (small)”. Ten judgment values in the range of “50” to “59” are assigned, and 40 judgment values in the range of “60” to “99” are assigned to the display mode “sword type (large)”.

  The effect control CPU 120 uses the variable category transmitted from the main board 11 from the ten types of hold display mode determination tables (variable category determination tables “H-TBL1” to “H-TBL10”) stored in the ROM 121. The hold display mode determination table corresponding to the variation category designated by the command is selected.

  For example, when the variation category specified by the variation category command is either the variation category “PA1” or the variation category “PA2”, the effect control CPU 120 selects the variation category determination table “H-TBL1”. When the variation category designated by the variation category command is the variation category “PA3”, the variation category determination table “H-TBL2” is selected. When the variation category designated by the variation category command is the variation category “PA4”, the variation category determination table “H-TBL3” is selected. When the variation category designated by the variation category command is the variation category “PA5”, the variation category determination table “H-TBL4” is selected. When the variation category designated by the variation category command is the variation category “PB3”, the variation category determination table “H-TBL5” is selected. When the variation category designated by the variation category command is the variation category “PB4”, the variation category determination table “H-TBL6” is selected. When the variation category designated by the variation category command is the variation category “PB5”, the variation category determination table “H-TBL7” is selected. When the variation category designated by the variation category command is the variation category “PA-T”, the variation category “PA-JD”, or the variation category “PA-KD”, the variation category determination table “H-TBL8” is selected. . When the variation category designated by the variation category command is the variation category “PA-JL” or the variation category “PA-KL”, the variation category determination table “H-TBL9” is selected. When the variation category designated by the variation category command is the variation category “PA-JW” or the variation category “PA-KW”, the variation category determination table “H-TBL10” is selected.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the selected hold display mode determination table, and uses the determination value assigned to each display mode and numerical data indicating the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. By comparing, one of a plurality of types of display modes is determined (determined). For example, when the variation category determination table “H-TBL3” is selected and the numerical data indicating the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display is “85”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode “sphere” (Blue) ". Further, for example, when the variable category determination table “H-TBL4” is selected and the numerical data indicating the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display is “85”, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the display mode “ “Sphere (red)” is determined.

  In addition, the display mode “sword (large)” of the hold display and the display mode “sword (small)” of the hold display suggest that there is a high possibility of a battle as compared with other display modes. The display mode “sword (large)” of the hold display suggests that the possibility of winning in the battle is higher than the display mode “sword (small)” of the hold display. The display mode “sword (small)” of the hold display suggests that the possibility of losing in the battle is higher than the display mode “sword (large)” of the hold display.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores information indicating the display mode of the hold display determined as described above in association with the buffer number of the pre-read notice buffer 194B corresponding to the winning buffer number. In the hold display mode determination process in step S162, whether or not the hold information by the start winning is set as the hold information of the target, or when the hold information by the start win is set as the hold information of the target An effect mode of the notice effect may be determined.

  After the winning effect determination process in step S150 shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, for example, in accordance with the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, step S170 shown in FIG. Any one of the processes of S177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 5. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, This includes processing for determining an effect control pattern based on the result notification command. For example, it includes processing for determining a final stop symbol in variable display, a main notice effect, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”. The variable display start setting process will be described later.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, decorative display variable display control during decorative display variable display) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 based on the read control data and displays it on the screen, and outputs an effect sound signal to the audio control board 13. Then, various kinds of effect control such as control for outputting the effect sound from the speaker 8 and control for turning on / off / flashing the lamp 9 by outputting the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 are executed. After performing such effect control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. Further, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hit effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the set content, and in step S172 Similar to the variable display effect processing, various effect controls in the small hit gaming state are executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electrical decoration signals, and the like. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and reads various control data based on the set contents, and in step S172 Similar to the variable display effect process, various effect controls at the end of the small hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electrical decoration signal, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the set content, and performs variable display in step S172. Similar to the medium effect process, various effect controls in the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, and the like. Further, in the big hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the set contents, and is performing variable display in step S172. Similar to the effect process, various effect controls at the end of the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result becomes “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S701). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S701; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the designated variation pattern is read. Is a non-reach variation pattern ("PA1-1", "PA2-1" to "PA2-3", "PA-T1") corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is "non-reach" It is determined whether or not (step S702).

  If it is determined in step S702 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S702; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S703). As an example, in the process of step S703, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Further, by referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative symbols is determined. In the process of step S703, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the variable symbol notice is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S703 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S703; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S704). As an example, in the process of step S704, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Further, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table, etc., a decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc. of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. To do. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S701 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S701; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S705). When it is determined to be “accuracy” or “small hit” (step S705; Yes), for example, a definite decoration that becomes a final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “accuracy” or “small hit”, such as an opening chance. A combination of symbols is determined (step S706). In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. It is only necessary to determine a combination of fixed decorative symbols that constitute any of the opening chance eyes by referring to.

  If it is determined in step S705 that it is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” or “small hit” (step S705; No), the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination is displayed. A combination is determined (step S707). As an example, in the process of step S707, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a jackpot determined symbol updated by a random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, etc., the decorative symbol with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. . At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the big hit, it may be determined that a different decorative symbol is determined as a final decorative symbol. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, any one of the plural types of normal symbols is selected and determined as the definite decorative symbol constituting the non-probable variation jackpot combination. That's fine. When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols is selected, and a definite ornament symbol that constitutes a non-probability variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. You just have to decide. At this time, when it is determined to be a definite decorative symbol of a non-probable variation big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the probable variation state is not performed in the re-drawing effect during variable display, and is executed corresponding to the big hit gaming state. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it is controlled to a probable change state by the promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of probability variation big hit combination, a notification that control is made to the probability variation state is performed in the re-lottery effect during variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S703, S704, S706, and S707, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control pattern setting processing (described later) (step S710).

  After performing the effect control pattern setting process (step S710), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold digest process (step S713). Specifically, when the decoration pattern starts to change in conjunction with the first special game or the second special game, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5H is changed to the variable display. The area is shifted to an area for displaying a corresponding hold display (not shown in FIG. 1; also referred to as a current display area or a digest display area), and when there is another hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H, the other hold is displayed. The display is shifted in the start winning storage display area 5H. For example, the display mode related to the shift of the hold display is set as the usage pattern of the effect control pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is supplied to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like. The hold display is shifted, for example, by transmitting to the other side. Note that the display in the current display area (also referred to as digestion display, active display, etc.) may be erased at the start of the variable display, during execution, or at the end.

  After executing the pending digest process (step S713), for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command ( Step S714). Subsequently, a change display start setting process for making a setting for starting the change of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 is executed (step S715). For example, the display control unit 123 outputs a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in the effect control pattern setting process (step S710) and the effect control pattern setting process (step S710). Audio control is performed for settings for starting the variation of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 by transmitting to a VDP or the like, or for the effect sound signal specified by the audio control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, by transmitting to the lamp control board 14 a setting for starting sound output from the speaker 8 by transmitting to the board 13 or transmitting an illumination signal specified by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern. Setting for starting light emission in the lamp 9 is performed.

  After the processing of step S715 is executed, the command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A is digested (step S716). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number, and in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command. The stored commands are shifted while maintaining the winning order. In the process of step S716, the information stored in the prefetch notice buffer 194B is deleted or shifted in accordance with the deletion or shift of the command in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S718), and the variable display start setting process (step S171) ends.

  Hereinafter, the effect control pattern setting process in step S710 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control pattern setting process. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern. 31 and 32 are explanatory diagrams illustrating the determination ratio of the main notice pattern. 33 and 34 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the prohibition conditions. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the change of the determination content. 36 to 38 are specific examples of changing the determination content.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type based on the variation pattern (step S720). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command, what kind of effect is to be performed in the change.

  As an example, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PA2-1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no effect (the effect is not performed). . The effect control CPU 120 determines slipping (effect) when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA2-2”. Further, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA2-3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pseudo-continuous representation of the number of pseudo-continuous variation “1”.

  In addition, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA3-1” or “PB3-1”, the production control CPU 120 determines that there is no production (not to produce the production). In addition, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA3-2” or “PB3-2”, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pseudo-continuous representation of the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation “1”. One of the roulette effects of the number “1” is determined.

  In addition, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-1”, “PB4-1”, “PA5-1”, or “PB5-1”, the effect control CPU 120 Nothing is determined (the effect is not performed). Further, the effect control CPU 120 simulates the pseudo when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-2”, “PB4-2”, “PA5-2”, or “PB5-2”. Either the pseudo continuous effect with the continuous fluctuation count “1”, the pseudo continuous effect or the roulette effect with the execution count “1” is determined. In addition, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-3”, “PB4-3”, “PA5-3”, or “PB5-3”, the effect control CPU 120 Either the pseudo-continuous effect with the continuous fluctuation count “2” or the roulette effect with the execution count “2” is determined. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a pseudo pattern when the variation pattern is “PA4-4”, “PB4-4”, “PA5-4”, or “PB5-4”. Either the pseudo-continuous effect with the continuous fluctuation count “3” or the roulette effect with the execution count “3” is determined. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a pseudo pattern when the variation pattern is “PA4-5”, “PB4-5”, “PA5-5”, or “PB5-5”. Either the pseudo continuous effect with the continuous fluctuation count “4” or the roulette effect with the execution count “4” is determined.

  In addition, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern in a high base state such as variation pattern “PA-T1”, “PA-JD1”, “PA-JD2”, etc. The production of the contents as shown in FIG. 7 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA-T1”, the effect control CPU 120 produces an effect when the battle is not executed (for example, an enemy base to rescue a fellow If the variation pattern “PA-JD1” is determined, the enemy (weak enemy) attack → friend side (losing) production is determined, and the variation pattern “PA-JD2” If there is, the production of a friendly attack → enemy (weak enemy) and dodge (loss) is determined.

  In ROM 121, as a table to be referred to when determining any one of a plurality of types of effects, an effect in which a determination value (a numerical value to be compared with a random number for effect determination (not shown)) is assigned to each effect. A determination table (not shown) is stored. For example, as a table to be referred to when the variation pattern is “PA3-2”, for each of “pseudo-continuous variation (once)” and “roulette effect (once)”, the above determination value (random number value for effect determination) As an effect determination table (not shown) to which (a numerical value to be compared with (not shown)) is assigned, or a table referred to when the fluctuation pattern is “PA4-2”, “pseudo continuous variation (once)” “pseudo continuous”. An effect determination table (not shown) in which the determination value (a numerical value to be compared with a random number for effect determination (not shown)) is assigned to each of the “gase effect” and “roulette effect (once)” is stored. ing. For example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA3-2”, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the variation pattern “PA3-2” table, and By comparing the determination value of “pseudo continuous variation (once)” and “roulette effect (once)” with numerical data indicating a random number (not shown) for effect determination, the number of pseudo continuous variations “1”. Or the roulette effect with the number of executions “1” is determined. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-2”, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the table for the variation pattern “PA4-2”, and By comparing the determination values of “pseudo-continuous variation (once)”, “pseudo-continuous effect” and “roulette effect (once)” with numerical data indicating a random number (not shown) for determining the effect, Either the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) of the continuous fluctuation number “1”, the pseudo continuous gasse effect, or the roulette effect of the execution number “1” is determined.

  After executing the process of step S720, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not to perform pseudo-continuation in the variation (step S721). That is, it is determined whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is determined in step S720.

  When it is determined in step S721 that the pseudo-continuous operation is to be performed (step S721: Yes), the temporary stop display effect mode of the pseudo-continuous effect is determined (step S722). In the process of step S722, the presentation mode of each temporary stop display corresponding to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is determined. That is, when the number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation is “1” (when the number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation “1” is determined in step S720), the effect mode of the first temporary stop display is determined. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2” (when the pseudo continuous effect of “2” is determined in step S720), the first and second temporary stop display effects are determined. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3” (when the pseudo continuous effect of “3” is determined in step S720), the first, second, and third temporary stop display effects are displayed. decide. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “4” (when the pseudo continuous effect of the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations “4” is determined in step S720), each of the first, second, third and fourth temporary stop displays is displayed. A production mode is determined. The effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the determination content determined in step S722 in the RAM 122.

  In the present embodiment, “normal” or “after reach” is determined as the temporary stop display effect mode. The effect mode “normal” of the temporary stop display is an effect of temporarily stopping the chance symbol before reaching reach. The temporary stop display effect mode “after reach” is an effect of temporarily stopping the chance symbol after reaching reach.

  That is, when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1”, it is determined whether the effect mode of the first temporary stop display is the effect mode “normal” or the effect mode “after reach”. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2”, it is determined whether the production mode “normal” or the production mode “after reach” is set for each production mode of the first and second temporary stop displays. In other words, the combination of the first and second temporary stop display effects (“normal” or “after reach”) may be determined. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”, it is determined whether the production mode “normal” or the production mode “after reach” is set for each production mode of the first, second, and third temporary stop displays. . That is, the combination of the first, second, and third temporary stop display effects (“normal” or “after reach”) may be determined. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “4”, whether the first, second, third, and fourth temporary stop display modes are set to “normal” or “post-reach” To decide. That is, it is only necessary to determine the combination of the first, second, third, and fourth temporary stop display effects (“normal” or “after reach”).

  In the ROM 121, each temporary stop display effect mode is used as a table to be referred to when determining the temporary stop display effect mode (“normal” or “after reach”) when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1”. A temporary stop display pattern determination table in which determination values (numerical values to be compared with the random number MR7 for determining the temporary stop display effect mode) are assigned is stored. The random value MR7 for determining the temporary stop display effect mode is assumed to take, for example, 100 values (100 types of numerical values) from “0” to “99”.

  FIG. 30A is a setting example of the production mode of temporary stop display by the temporary stop display pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1”. In FIG. 30A, the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP1” is a temporary stop display pattern in which the effect mode of the first temporary stop display is “normal”. The temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP2” is a temporary stop display pattern in which the effect mode of the first temporary stop display is “after reach”. “G1T1” is a determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP1”. “G1T2” is a determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP2”. “G1T1” + “G1T2” = 100. That is, for 100 possible values of the random number MR7 for determining the temporary stop display effect mode (100 from the above-mentioned “0” to “99”), G1T1 pieces are included in the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP1”. G1T2 pieces are assigned to the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP2”.

  Similarly, the ROM 121 displays the temporary stop display effect as a table that is referred to when determining the temporary stop display effect mode (“normal” or “after reach”) when the pseudo continuous variation count is “2”. Temporary stop display pattern determination table in which a determination value (a numerical value compared with random number MR7 for determining the effect mode of temporary stop display) is assigned to each of the modes, or temporary stop display when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3” As a table to be referred to when determining the production mode (“normal” or “after reach”), each of the temporary stop display production modes is compared with a determination value (random number MR7 for determining the temporary stop display production mode). Is referred to when determining the temporary stop display effect mode (“normal” or “after reach”) when the pseudo continuous fluctuation count is “4”. Table and Te, the suspend display temporary stop display pattern determination table assigned respectively to the determination value of the representation embodiment (numerical value is compared with the random number MR7 for representation embodiment the determination of the suspend display) of are stored.

  FIG. 30B is a setting example of the effect mode of the temporary stop display by the temporary stop display pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”. In FIG. 30B, the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP1” has the first temporary stop display effect mode “normal”, the second temporary stop display effect mode “normal”, and the third time. Is a temporary stop display pattern in which the effect mode of the temporary stop display is “normal”. The temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” has an effect mode of the first temporary stop display as “normal”, an effect mode of the second temporary stop display as “normal”, and an effect mode of the third temporary stop display. Is a temporary stop display pattern in which “after reach”. The temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP3” has an effect mode of the first temporary stop display as “normal”, an effect mode of the second temporary stop display as “after reach”, and an effect of the third temporary stop display. This is a temporary stop display pattern whose mode is “normal”. The temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4” has an effect mode of the first temporary stop display as “normal”, an effect mode of the second temporary stop display as “after reach”, and an effect of the third temporary stop display. It is a temporary stop display pattern whose mode is “after reach”. The same applies to the temporary stop display patterns “G3-TP5” to “G3-TP8”. “G3T1” is a determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP1”. “G3T2” is a determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2”. “G3T3” is a determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP3”. “G3T4” is a determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4”. The same applies to “G3T5” to “G3T8.“ G3T1 ”+“ G3T2 ”+... +“ G3T7 ”+“ G3T8 ”= 100. That is, for 100 possible values of the random number MR7 for determining the temporary stop display effect mode (100 from the above-mentioned “0” to “99”), G3T1 is included in the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP1”. G3T2 are allocated to the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2”, G3T7 are allocated to the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP7”, and G3T8 are allocated to the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP8”. Assigned.

  It should be noted that the setting example of the temporary stop display effect mode based on the temporary stop display pattern determination table that is referred to when the pseudo continuous fluctuation count is “2”, and the temporary stop that is referred to when the pseudo continuous fluctuation count is “4”. The same applies to the setting example of the effect mode of temporary stop display by the display pattern determination table, and the description is omitted.

  Accordingly, in the process of step S722, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation count is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop display pattern determination table for the pseudo continuous fluctuation count “1”, and each temporary stop display pattern. By comparing the determination value assigned to (temporary stop display patterns “G1-TP1” to “G1-TP2”) with the numerical data indicating the random value MR7 for determining the effect mode of the temporary stop display, The temporary stop display pattern (any one of the temporary stop display patterns “G1-TP1” to “G1-TP2”) is determined. Further, when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2”, the production control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop display pattern determination table for the pseudo continuous fluctuations “2” and assigns each temporary stop display pattern (not shown). Any temporary stop display pattern (not shown) is determined by comparing the determined determination value with the numerical data indicating the random value MR7 for determining the temporary stop display effect mode. When the number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop display pattern determination table for the number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation “3”, and displays each temporary stop display pattern (temporary stop display pattern “G3- TP1 ”to“ G3-TP8 ”) and the numerical data indicating the random number MR7 for determining the effect mode of the temporary stop display are compared to determine one of the temporary stop display patterns (provisional Any one of the stop display patterns “G3-TP1” to “G3-TP8” is determined. In addition, when the pseudo continuous variation count is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop display pattern determination table for the pseudo continuous variation count “4” and assigns it to each temporary stop display pattern (not shown). Any temporary stop display pattern (not shown) is determined by comparing the determined determination value with the numerical data indicating the random value MR7 for determining the temporary stop display effect mode.

  In the process of step S722, for example, when the temporary control display pattern “G1-TP1” is determined, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores information indicating the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP1” in the RAM 122 as the determination content. Remember. In addition, instead of or in addition to the information indicating the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP1”, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores in RAM 122 that the effect mode of the first temporary stop display is “normal”. (For example, a value corresponding to the effect mode “normal” may be temporarily stored in an area for storing the effect mode of the first temporary stop display in the RAM 122). In the process of step S722, for example, when the temporary control display pattern “G3-TP4” is determined, the effect control CPU 120 stores information indicating the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4” as the determination content in the RAM 122. Temporarily store. In addition, instead of or in addition to the information indicating the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4”, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the effect mode of the first temporary stop display in the RAM 122 is “normal”. It may be temporarily stored that the display mode of the stop display is “after reach” and the effect mode of the third temporary stop display is “after reach” (for example, the first temporary display in the RAM 122). A value corresponding to the effect mode “normal” is temporarily stored in the area for storing the effect mode of the stop display, and a value corresponding to the effect mode “after reach” is temporarily stored in the area for storing the effect mode of the second temporary stop display. The value corresponding to the production mode “after reach” may be temporarily stored in an area for storing the production mode of the third temporary stop display. In addition, even if it is a case where either the information which shows a temporary stop display pattern in RAM122, or the production | presentation aspect of a temporary stop display is memorize | stored, the other which is not memorize | stored can be specified based on the said memorize | stored one. it can.

  After executing the processing of step S722, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the effect mode of the main notice effect when there is a pseudo-ream (step S723). In the process of step S723, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the temporary stop display and the effect mode of the main notice effect after the last temporary stop display according to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations are determined. In other words, when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1” (when the pseudo continuous effect of “1” is determined in step S720), the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display, The effect mode of the main notice effect after the first temporary stop display is determined. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2”, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display, and after the second temporary stop display The main notice announcement effect aspect after the temporary stop display of the main notice effect effect form is determined. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display, and the third time before the temporary stop display The main preview effect presentation mode and the main preview effect presentation mode after the third temporary stop display are determined. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “4”, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display, and the third time before the temporary stop display Effect of the main notice effect before the fourth temporary stop display, and effect of the main notice effect after the temporary stop display of the effect state of the main notice effect after the fourth temporary stop display A mode is determined. The effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the determination content determined in step S723 in the RAM 122.

  In the present embodiment, the main notice effect when there is a pseudo-ream is, for example, a serif effect or a window effect. There are “blue”, “red”, and “re” in the main notice effect. The production mode “re” notifies that the pseudo-continuation continues. In dialogue productions and window productions, the player uses a wording (for example, “Re”, “Replay”, “Still More!”, Etc.) to inform the player that the pseudo-continuation will continue, or the player that the pseudo-continuation will continue The effect mode “re” is a picture (for example, a plum or the like) to be notified. When the main notice effect of the production mode “re” is executed, the chance symbol indicating that the pseudo-continuation continues is displayed temporarily (after that, the pseudo-continuation continues).

  The production modes “red” and “blue” notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high (or low). The reliability of the jackpot that the effect mode “red” notifies is higher than the reliability of the jackpot that the effect mode “blue” notifies. That is, when the main notice effect of the effect mode “red” is executed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the main notice effect of the effect mode “blue” is executed. In line productions and window productions, a word that informs the player that the big hit is relatively high (compared to the production mode “blue”) (for example, a message including “heat”), The effect mode “red” is a specific color (for example, red or gold) that informs the player that the background color in the frame or the color of the frame is relatively high. On the other hand, in line productions and window productions, a word that informs the player that the big hit is relatively low (compared to the production mode “red”) (for example, “chance?”), The effect mode “blue” is a color that notifies the player that the background color or the color of the frame in the frame is relatively low (for example, a color other than the specific color). Further, the pseudo-continuation may continue even when the production mode “blue” or “red” is executed. That is, when the production mode “re” is executed, the pseudo-continuation is always continued as described above, but when the production mode “blue” or “red” is executed, the pseudo-continuation is not continued. There are cases.

  That is, when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1”, the production mode “blue” is applied to the production mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display and the production mode of the main notice effect after the first temporary stop display. ”, The production mode“ red ”, or the production mode“ re ”. That is, the combination of effects before the first temporary stop display and after the first temporary stop display (“blue”, “red”, or “re”) may be determined. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2”, the production mode “about the main announcement effect before the first and second temporary stop displays and the production mode of the main announcement effect after the second temporary stop display” It is determined whether the production mode is “red”, the production mode “red”, or the production mode “re”. That is, the combination of effects (“blue”, “red”, or “re”) before the first and second temporary stop displays and after the second temporary stop display may be determined. When the quasi-continuous variation count is “3”, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first, second, and third temporary stop displays and the effect state of the main notice effect after the third temporary stop display are as follows: Whether the production mode “blue”, the production mode “red”, or the production mode “re” is determined. That is, the combination of effects (“blue”, “red”, or “re”) before the first, second, and third temporary stop displays and after the third temporary stop display may be determined. When the quasi-continuous fluctuation number is “4”, the main preview effect before the first, second, third, and fourth temporary stop displays and the main preview effect after the fourth temporary stop display , It is determined whether the production mode “blue”, the production mode “red”, or the production mode “re”. That is, if the combination of effects (“blue” or “red” or “re”) before the first, second, third and fourth temporary stop display and after the fourth temporary stop display is determined. Good.

  The ROM 121 stores the main notice effect as a table that is referred to when determining the effect mode (“blue”, “red”, or “re”) of the main notice effect when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1”. A plurality of main notice pattern determination tables in which determination values (numerical values to be compared with the random number MR8 for determining the effect form of the main notice effect) are assigned to the respective aspects are stored. Specifically, when the jackpot is reached, the main notice pattern determination table for the jackpot / pseudo-variable number of times “1” referred to when the number of times of pseudo-continuous fluctuation is “1”, and when it is lost. In addition, two types of main notice pattern determination tables are stored: a main notice pattern determination table for lost / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “1” that is referred to when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1”. Note that the random number MR8 for determining the effect mode of the main notice effect takes, for example, 100 values (100 types of numerical values) from “0” to “99”.

  FIG. 31 shows a main notice pattern determination table (main notice pattern determination table for big hit / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “1”, lost / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “1” referred to when the pseudo continuous fluctuation count is “1”. This is a setting example of the production mode of the main notice effect by the main notice pattern determination table for “1”. In FIG. 31, the main notice pattern “G1-YP1” is “blue” as the effect of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display, and the effect of the main notice effect after the first temporary stop display is “ The main notice pattern is “Blue”. In the main notice pattern “G1-YP2”, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is “blue”, and the effect mode of the main notice effect after the first temporary stop display is “red”. Main notice pattern. In the main notice pattern “G1-YP3”, the effect form of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is “red”, and the effect form of the main notice effect after the first temporary stop display is “red”. Main notice pattern. In the main notice pattern “G1-YP4”, the effect form of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is “re”, and the effect form of the main notice effect after the first temporary stop display is “blue”. Main notice pattern. In the main notice pattern “G1-YP5”, the effect form of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is “re”, and the effect form of the main notice effect after the first temporary stop display is “red”. Main notice pattern. “G1Y1” is a determination ratio of the main notice pattern “G1-YP1”. “G1Y2” is a determination ratio of the main notice pattern “G1-YP2”. “G1Y3” is a determination ratio of the main notice pattern “G1-YP3”. “G1Y4” is a determination ratio of the main notice pattern “G1-YP4”. “G1Y5” is a determination ratio of the main notice pattern “G1-YP5”. “G1Y1” + “G1Y2” + “G1Y3” + “G1Y4” + “G1Y5” = 100. That is, G1Y1 are assigned to the main notice pattern “G1-YP1” for 100 possible values (100 of the above-mentioned “0” to “99”) of the random number MR8 for determining the effect mode of the main notice effect. G1Y2 pieces are assigned to the main notice pattern “G1-YP2”, G1Y3 pieces are assigned to the main notice pattern “G1-YP3”, and G1Y4 pieces are assigned to the main notice pattern “G1-YP4”. G1Y5 pieces are assigned to “G1-YP5”.

  Although it has been described that the performance mode “red” has a higher degree of reliability than the performance mode “blue”, specifically, for example, when the game is a big hit (the variation pattern “PB3-2”, the variation pattern “PB4-2”). ”To“ PB4-5 ”, variation patterns“ PB5-2 ”to“ PB5-5 ”, etc.) At least one before the first temporary stop display or after the first temporary stop display The main notice pattern (“G1-YP2”, “G1-YP3”, “G1-YP5”) that is “red” is displayed before the first temporary stop display and after the first temporary stop display. It is easier to determine than the main notice pattern (“G1-YP1”, “G1-YP4”) that does not become the production mode “red”, and when it is lost (the variation pattern “PA3-2”, the variation pattern “PA4-2”) "PA4-5", variable pattern (When “PA5-2” to “PA5-5”, etc.) The main notice pattern in which neither the first temporary stop display nor the first temporary stop display becomes the production mode “red” At least one before the first temporary stop display or after the first temporary stop display is more easily determined than the main notice pattern in which the effect mode is “red”.

  That is, the main notice pattern determination table for the big hit / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “1” is before the first temporary stop display compared to the main notice pattern determination table for the loss / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “1”. Or, the number of judgment values (“G1-YP2”, “G1-YP3”, “G1-YP5”) for the main notice pattern in which at least one after the first temporary stop display becomes the production mode “red” (“ G1Y2 "+" G1Y3 "+" G1Y5 ").

  Similarly, in the ROM 121, as a main notice pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2”, the big hit that is referred to when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2”. Main notice pattern determination table for hour / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “2” and lost / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “2” to be referred to when it is lost and the pseudo continuous fluctuation count is “2” Two types of main notice pattern determination tables are stored. In the ROM 121, as the main notice pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”, the big hit time that is referred to when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”. / The main notice pattern determination table for the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations “3”, and for lost / pseudo continuous fluctuation times “3” to be referred to when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3” Two types of main notice pattern determination tables are stored. In the ROM 121, as a main notice pattern determination table that is referred to when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “4”, the big hit time that is referenced when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “4”. / Main notice pattern determination table for pseudo continuous fluctuation count “4”, and for lost / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “4” to be referred to when lost and pseudo continuous fluctuation count is “4” Two types of main notice pattern determination tables are stored.

  FIG. 32 shows a main notice pattern determination table (main hitting pattern determination table for big hit / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “3”, lost / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “3” referred to when the pseudo continuous fluctuation count is “3”. 3 ”is a setting example of the production mode of the main notice effect by the main notice pattern determination table for“ 3 ”. In FIG. 32, the main notice pattern “G3-YP1” is “blue” as the effect of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display, and the effect of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display is “ This is a main notice pattern in which the effect mode of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is “blue” and the effect form of the main notice effect after the third temporary stop display is “blue”. In the main notice pattern “G3-YP2”, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is “blue”, and the effect mode of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display is “blue”. This is a main notice pattern in which the effect mode of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is “blue” and the effect form of the main notice effect after the third temporary stop display is “red”. The main notice pattern “G3-YP3” is “blue” as the effect of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display, and “blue” as the effect of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display. This is a main notice pattern in which the effect mode of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is “red” and the effect form of the main notice effect after the third temporary stop display is “red”. The same applies to the main notice patterns “G3-YP4” to “G3-YP28”. “G3Y1” is a determination ratio of the main notice pattern “G3-YP1”. “G3Y2” is a determination ratio of the main notice pattern “G3-YP2”. “G3Y3” is a determination ratio of the main notice pattern “G3-YP3”. The same applies to “G3Y4” to “G3Y28”. “G3Y1” + “G3Y2” + “G3Y3” +... + “G3Y28” = 100. That is, for the 100 possible values (100 of the above-mentioned “0” to “99”) of the random value MR8 for determining the effect mode of the main notice effect, G3Y1 is assigned to the main notice pattern “G3-YP1”. G3Y2 are assigned to the main notice pattern “G3-YP2”, G3Y3 pieces are assigned to the main notice pattern “G3-YP3”,..., G3Y28 pieces are assigned to the main notice pattern “G3-YP28”. .

  Further, as described above, the production mode “red” has a higher reliability than the production mode “blue”. For example, when the big game is a big hit, before the first temporary stop display, before the second temporary stop display, The main notice pattern (“G3-YP2”, “G3-YP3”,...) Before the third temporary stop display or after the third temporary stop display becomes the production mode “red” is the first time. Before the second temporary stop display, before the second temporary stop display, before the third temporary stop display, and after the third temporary stop display, the main notice pattern ("G3-YP1 ”,“ G3-YP4 ”,... There is a main notice pattern that does not become the production mode “red” after the temporary stop display. Before the first temporary stop display, before the second temporary stop display, before the third temporary stop display, or after the third temporary stop display, at least one is determined from the main notice pattern in which the production mode is “red” It is easy to be done.

  That is, the main notice pattern determination table for the big hit / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “3” is before the first temporary stop display compared to the main notice pattern determination table for the loss / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “3”. Before the second temporary stop display, at least one before the third temporary stop display, or after the third temporary stop display, the main notice pattern (“G3-YP2”, “G3- The number of determination values (“G3Y2” + “G3Y3” +...) For YP3 ”,.

  It should be noted that the setting example of the main notice effect production mode by the main notice pattern determination table referred to when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2”, and the main notice pattern referred to when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “4”. The same applies to the setting example of the effect mode of the main notice effect by the determination table, and the description is omitted. Note that the number of main notice patterns when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”, as shown in FIG. 32, is all the production modes (“blue” and “blue”, except when the main notice effect is down (when downfall occurs)). The number of all combinations of “red” and “re”) is not necessarily used. The fall of the main notice effect means that when the effect form of the main notice effect in the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect is “blue”, the effect form of the main notice effect in the subsequent number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect is “red”. Is to become. That is, the reliability of the main notice effect executed at a certain number of times is lower than the reliability of the main notice effect executed at a previous number of times. Further, although the random number MR8 for determining the production mode of the main notice effect is assumed to be 100 for convenience of explanation, other values (for example, 101 or more) may be used. The same applies to the random number MR7 for determining the temporary stop display effect mode.

  Accordingly, in the process of step S723, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the main notice pattern determination table for the big hit / pseudo continuous variation count “1” when the big hit is the pseudo continuous variation count “1”. When the number of times of quasi-continuous fluctuation is “1”, the main notice pattern determination table for the time of losing / number of quasi-continuous fluctuations “1” is referred to. By comparing the determination value assigned to the pattern “G1-YP1” to “G1-YP5”) and the numerical data indicating the random value MR8 for determining the effect mode of the main notice effect, A pattern (any one of main notice patterns “G1-YP1” to “G1-YP5”) is determined. Further, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the main notice pattern determination table for the big hit / pseudo continuous variation count “2” when the big hit is the pseudo continuous variation count “2”. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2”, the main notice pattern determination table for lost / pseudo continuous fluctuations “2” is referred to and assigned to each main notice pattern (not shown). One of the main notice patterns (not shown) is determined by comparing the determination value with the numerical data indicating the random value MR8 for determining the main notice effect effect mode.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the main notice pattern determination table for the big hit / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “3” when the big hit is the pseudo continuous fluctuation count “3”. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”, the main notice pattern determination table for lost / pseudo continuous fluctuations “3” is referred to, and each main notice pattern (main notice pattern “G3-YP1” is referred to). ~ "G3-YP28") and the numerical data indicating the random value MR8 for determining the effect mode of the main notice effect are compared with one of the main notice patterns (the main notice pattern " Any one of “G3-YP1” to “G3-YP28”) is determined. Further, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the main notice pattern determination table for the big hit / pseudo continuous fluctuation count “4” when the big hit is the pseudo continuous fluctuation count “4”. When the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “4”, the main notice pattern determination table for lost / pseudo continuous fluctuations “4” is referred to and assigned to each main notice pattern (not shown). One of the main notice patterns (not shown) is determined by comparing the determination value with the numerical data indicating the random value MR8 for determining the main notice effect effect mode.

  In the process of step S723, for example, when the main notice pattern “G1-YP1” is determined, the CPU 120 for effect control temporarily stores information indicating the main notice pattern “G1-YP1” in the RAM 122 as the determination content. . In addition, instead of or in addition to the information indicating the main notice pattern “G1-YP1”, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the effect form of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display in the RAM 122 is “blue”. Further, it may be temporarily stored that the effect mode of the main notice effect after the first temporary stop display is “blue” (for example, the effect state of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display in the RAM 122). Temporarily stores the value corresponding to the production mode “blue” in the region storing the production mode of the main notice effect after the first temporary stop display. You may). In the processing of step S722, for example, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines the main notice pattern “G3-YP4”, information indicating the main notice pattern “G3-YP4” is temporarily stored in the RAM 122 as the determination content. Remember. In addition, instead of or in addition to the information indicating the main notice pattern “G3-YP4”, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the effect form of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display in the RAM 122 is “blue”. The effect of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display is “blue”, the effect of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is “re”, and the third It may be temporarily stored that the effect mode of the main notice effect after the stop display is “blue” (for example, the effect is stored in the RAM 122 in the area for storing the effect state of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display). The value corresponding to the aspect “blue” is temporarily stored, the value corresponding to the effect aspect “blue” is temporarily stored in the area for storing the effect state of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display, and the third temporary In the area for storing the effect mode of the main notice effect before the stop display, the effect mode “ Temporarily storing a value corresponding to ", it may be temporarily stored for the third time value corresponding to the effect aspect" blue "in the area for storing the performance aspect of the main announcement attraction after the temporary stop display). Even if either one of the information indicating the main notice pattern or the production mode of the main notice effect is stored in the RAM 122, the other not stored can be specified based on the stored one. .

  After executing the process of step S723, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not a predetermined prohibition condition is satisfied in the determination result of step S722 and the determination result of step S723 (step S730).

  FIG. 33 shows the contents of the prohibition condition when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1”. The prohibition condition 1-1 is a prohibition condition for the combination of the main notice pattern “G1-YP4” and the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP2” because the first pseudo-ream is inconsistent. That is, in the case of the combination of the main notice pattern “G1-YP4” and the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP2”, since the first pseudo-ream is so-called pre-learning as the post-reach pseudo-ream, the prohibition condition It is said. The prohibition condition 1-2 is a prohibition condition for the combination of the main notice pattern “G1-YP5” and the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP2” because the first pseudo-ream is inconsistent. That is, similarly to the prohibition condition 1-2, in the case of the combination of the main notice pattern “G1-YP5” and the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP2”, it is so-called that the first pseudo-ream is a post-reach pseudo-ream. Because it is barre, it is a forbidden condition.

  That is, in the main notice pattern “G1-YP4” and the main notice pattern “G1-YP5”, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is “re”, and the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP2”. The first temporary stop display mode is “after reach”, and the player is notified that the chance eyes will be temporarily stopped after reach, and the chance eyes are temporarily stopped after the reach as predicted. It is. Therefore, the degree of excitement of the player is reduced compared to a mode in which the chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed after reaching without notifying the player. Also, depending on the character of the player, the time zone, etc., there is a possibility that the temporary stop display of the chance after the reach as shown in the notice may appear redundant or excessive. For the above reasons, the prohibition condition 1-1 and the prohibition condition 1-2 are provided.

  FIG. 34 shows the contents (part) of the prohibition condition when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”. For example, the prohibition condition 3-1 is a prohibition condition for the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP4” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” because the third pseudo-ream is inconsistent. In other words, in the case of the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP4” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2”, the third pseudo-ream is preliminarily determined to be a post-reach pseudo-ream. Yes. The prohibition condition 3-2 is a prohibition condition for the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP4” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4” because the third pseudo-ream is inconsistent. That is, in the same manner as the prohibition condition 3-1, in the case of the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP4” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4”, if the third pseudo-ream is the pseudo-ream after reach, Therefore, it is a prohibited condition.

  The prohibition condition 3-9 is a prohibition condition for the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” because the third pseudo-ream is inconsistent. In other words, in the case of the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2”, the third pseudo-run is pre-empted as a post-reach pseudo-run. Yes. The prohibition condition 3-10 is a prohibition condition for the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4” because the third pseudo-ream is inconsistent. That is, in the case of the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4”, as in the forbidden condition 3-9, if the third pseudo-run is a post-reach pseudo-run, Therefore, it is a prohibited condition.

  The forbidden condition 3-33 is a forbidden condition for the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP12” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4” because the second and third pseudo-series are inconsistent. In other words, in the case of the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP12” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4”, the second and third pseudo-runs are preliminarily determined to be the post-reach pseudo-runs. It is a forbidden condition. The prohibition condition 3-40 is a prohibition condition for the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP14” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP8” because the third pseudo-ream is inconsistent. In other words, in the case of the combination of the main notice pattern “G3-YP14” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP8”, the third pseudo-run is preemptive as a post-reach pseudo-run, so as a prohibition condition Yes.

  Since the contents of the prohibition condition when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2” and the content of the prohibition conditions when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “4”, the description is omitted.

  Therefore, in the process of step S730, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the combination of the temporary stop display pattern determined in step S722 and the main notice pattern determined in step S723 when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1” is shown in FIG. Is determined to be in agreement with any of the prohibition conditions (prohibition conditions 1-1 to 1-2), and when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2”, the temporary stop display pattern determined in step S722; It is determined whether or not the combination of the main notice pattern determined in step S723 matches any of the forbidden conditions (not shown). If the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”, the temporary stop display determined in step S722 is determined. The combination of the pattern and the main notice pattern determined in step S723 is the prohibition rule of FIG. It is determined whether or not any of (prohibition conditions 3-1, 3-2,...) Is satisfied, and when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “4”, the temporary stop display pattern determined in step S722, It is determined whether or not the combination of the main notice pattern determined in S723 matches any of the forbidden conditions (not shown).

  When it is determined in step S730 that the predetermined prohibition condition is satisfied (step S730: Yes), that is, the combination of the temporary stop display pattern determined in step S722 and the main notice pattern determined in step S723 is the prohibition condition. If it matches any of these combinations, the content of determination in step S723 (effect mode of the main notice effect) is changed (step S731). In the process of step S731, the CPU 120 for effect control changes the effect mode of the main notice effect according to the established prohibition condition.

  FIG. 35A shows the contents of change when each prohibition condition is satisfied when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1”. FIG. 35A shows that when the prohibition condition 1-1 is satisfied, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue”, or the prohibition condition 1-2 is When established, it represents that the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue”.

  When the prohibition condition 1-1 or the prohibition condition 1-2 is satisfied, the effect of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue”. Inconsistency of the first pseudo-ream is resolved.

  FIG. 35 (B) shows the contents of change (partial) when each prohibition condition is satisfied when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”. FIG. 35 (B) shows, as an example of the change contents, that when the prohibition condition 3-1 is satisfied, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue”, When the prohibition condition 3-2 is satisfied, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue”, or when the prohibition condition 3-9 is satisfied, the third temporary The effect of the main notice effect before the stop display is changed from “Re” to “Blue”, and the effect of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop indication is changed from “Red” to “Blue” Or, when the prohibition condition 3-10 is satisfied, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue”, and the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display. When the effect mode is changed from “red” to “blue” or when the forbidden condition 3-33 is satisfied, the third time The effect of the main notice effect before the stop display is changed from “Re” to “Blue”, and the effect of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop indication is changed from “Re” to “Blue” Or, when the prohibition condition 3-40 is satisfied, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue”, and the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display. The effect mode of “red” is changed from “red” to “blue”, and the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is changed from “red” to “blue”.

  When the prohibition condition 3-1 or the prohibition condition 3-2 is satisfied, the effect of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue”. Inconsistency of the third pseudo-ream is resolved.

  When the prohibition condition 3-9 or the prohibition condition 3-10 is satisfied, the effect of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue”, which occurs before the change. Inconsistency of the third pseudo-ream is resolved. In addition, when the prohibition condition 3-9 or the prohibition condition 3-10 is satisfied, the production mode of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display is changed from “red” to “blue”. Decline of the main notice effect produced by the change of the effect form of the main notice effect before the temporary stop display (the effect state “red” of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop indication → the main notice effect before the third temporary stop indication Effect mode “blue”) is canceled (the effect mode “blue” of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display → the effect mode “blue” of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display) .

  When the prohibition condition 3-33 is established, the second time that occurred before the change by changing the production mode of the main notice effect before the second and third temporary stop display from “re” to “blue” The mismatch of the third pseudo-ream is eliminated. In addition, when the prohibition condition 3-40 is satisfied, by changing the production mode of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display from “re” to “blue”, the third time that occurred before the change Pseudo-ream inconsistencies are resolved. Further, when the prohibition condition 3-40 is satisfied, the third temporary stop display is made by changing the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first and second temporary stop display from “red” to “blue”. Decline of the main notice effect produced by the change of the effect form of the previous main notice effect (the first notice effect state of the main notice effect before the first and second temporary stop display “red” → the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display Effect mode “blue”) is canceled (first blue notification effect state before the second temporary stop display “blue” → main warning effect state “blue” before the third temporary stop display) Becomes).

  Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the prohibition condition 1-1 is satisfied in the process of step S730 (step S730; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The production mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue” (step S731).

  The upper part of FIG. 36A (before the change / when the condition is satisfied) schematically shows the contents stored in the RAM 122 by the main notice pattern “G1-YP4” and the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP2”. That is, “re” in the “notice” column under the “first pseudo continuous fluctuation” column is “re” before the first temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G1-YP4” shown in FIG. “Blue” in the “notice” column below the “after first quasi-variable” column indicates “blue” after the first temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G1-YP4” shown in FIG. Is shown. Also, “after reach” in the “temporary stop” column under the “first pseudo continuous fluctuation” column is the first temporary stop display of the temporary stop display pattern “G1-TP2” shown in FIG. Shows “after reach”. The lower part of FIG. 36 (A) (after change) schematically shows the stored contents in the RAM 122 after the effect mode of the main notice effect of the first pseudo-ream is changed from “re” to “blue”. . In the upper stage → lower stage of FIG. 36 (A), the production mode of the main notice effect of the first pseudo-ream is changed from “re” to “blue”.

  For example, when it is determined that the prohibition condition 3-1 is satisfied in the process of step S730 (step S730; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The effect mode of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue” (step S731).

  The upper part of FIG. 36B (before the change / when the condition is satisfied) schematically shows the contents stored in the RAM 122 by the main notice pattern “G3-YP4” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2”. That is, “blue” in the “notice” column under the “first pseudo continuous fluctuation” column is “blue” before the first temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP4” shown in FIG. “Blue” in the “notice” column under the “second pseudo continuous fluctuation” column indicates “blue” before the second temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP4” shown in FIG. “Re” in the “Notice” column under the “3rd pseudo-variation” column indicates “Re” before the third temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP4” shown in FIG. “Blue” in the “notice” column under the “after third pseudo-variation” column indicates “blue” after the third temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP4” shown in FIG. Is shown. In addition, “Normal” in the “Temporary stop” column under the “First quasi-continuous fluctuation” column is the first temporary stop display of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” shown in FIG. “Normal” indicates “normal”, and “normal” in the “temporary stop” column below the “second pseudo continuous fluctuation” column indicates the second time of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” shown in FIG. “Normal” of the temporary stop display indicates “after reaching” in the “temporary stop” column below the “third pseudo continuous fluctuation” column, and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” illustrated in FIG. "After reach" of the third temporary stop display of "". The lower part (after change) of FIG. 36 (B) schematically shows the stored contents in the RAM 122 after changing the effect mode of the main notice effect of the third pseudo-ream from “re” to “blue”. . In the upper stage → lower stage of FIG. 36 (B), the production mode of the main notice effect of the third pseudo-ream is changed from “re” to “blue”.

  For example, when it is determined that the prohibition condition 3-2 is satisfied in the process of step S730 (step S730; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The effect mode of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display is changed from “re” to “blue” (step S731).

  For example, when it is determined that the prohibition condition 3-9 is established in the process of step S730 (step S730; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The effect mode of the main notice effect of the second pseudo-stop (before the second temporary stop display) is changed from “re” to “blue”, “Red” is changed to “blue” (step S731).

  The upper part of FIG. 37A (before the change / when the condition is satisfied) schematically shows the contents stored in the RAM 122 by the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2”. That is, “blue” in the “notice” column under the “first pseudo continuous variation” column is “blue” before the first temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” shown in FIG. “Red” in the “notice” column under the “second pseudo continuous fluctuation” column indicates “red” before the second temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” shown in FIG. “Re” in the “Notice” column under the “Third Pseudo Continuous Variation” column indicates “Re” before the third temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” shown in FIG. “Red” in the “Notice” column below the “After third quasi-continuous change” column indicates “Red” after the third temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” shown in FIG. Is shown. In addition, “Normal” in the “Temporary stop” column under the “First quasi-continuous fluctuation” column is the first temporary stop display of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” shown in FIG. “Normal” indicates “normal”, and “normal” in the “temporary stop” column below the “second pseudo continuous fluctuation” column indicates the second time of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” shown in FIG. “Normal” of the temporary stop display indicates “after reaching” in the “temporary stop” column below the “third pseudo continuous fluctuation” column, and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” illustrated in FIG. "After reach" of the third temporary stop display of "". The interruption (after change (1)) in FIG. 37 (A) schematically shows the contents stored in the RAM 122 after changing the production mode of the main notice effect of the third pseudo-ream from “re” to “blue”. Represents. The lower part of FIG. 37A (after change (2)) schematically shows the contents stored in the RAM 122 after the effect mode of the main notice effect of the second pseudo-ream is changed from “red” to “blue”. Represents. In the upper part to the lower part of FIG. 37A, the effect mode of the main announcement effect of the third pseudo-ream is changed from “re” to “blue”, and the effect mode of the main effect of the second pseudo-ream is “red”. To "blue". Note that the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage in FIG. The order of change may be changed before the second pseudo-continuation or before the third pseudo-continuation, or may be changed substantially simultaneously. However, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), if the number of pseudo-reams with the highest number of times (the number of pseudo-reams with the highest number of times) is changed in order, the production mode with high reliability (for example, the production mode “ The reliability can be suitably changed, for example, the reliability of “red” or the like can be maintained. This is similar to FIGS. 37B, 38B, 45A, 45B, and 46A.

  For example, when it is determined that the prohibition condition 3-10 is satisfied in the process of step S730 (step S730; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The effect mode of the main notice effect of the second pseudo-stop (before the second temporary stop display) is changed from “re” to “blue”, “Red” is changed to “blue” (step S731).

  For example, when it is determined that the prohibition condition 3-33 is established in the process of step S730 (step S730; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The effect mode of the main notice effect of the second pseudo-stop (before the second temporary stop display) is changed from “re” to “blue”, “Re” is changed to “blue” (step S731).

  The upper part of FIG. 38A (before the change / when the condition is satisfied) schematically shows the contents stored in the RAM 122 by the main notice pattern “G3-YP12” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4”. That is, “blue” in the “notice” column under the “first pseudo continuous fluctuation” column is “blue” before the first temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP12” shown in FIG. “Re” in the “Notice” column under the “Second pseudo-variation” column indicates “Re” before the second temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP12” shown in FIG. “Re” in the “Notice” column under the “Pseudo Fluctuation for the third time” field indicates “Re” before the third temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP12” shown in FIG. “Red” in the “Notice” column under the “After third quasi-continuous change” column indicates “red” after the third temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP12” shown in FIG. Is shown. Also, “Normal” in the “Temporary stop” column under the “First quasi-continuous fluctuation” column is the first temporary stop display of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4” shown in FIG. “Normal” is indicated, and “After Reach” in the “Temporary Stop” column under the “Second Pseudo Continuous Variation” column is the second time of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4” shown in FIG. “After reach” of the temporary stop display of “No. 3”, “After reach” in the “Temporary stop” column under the “Third-time pseudo continuous change” column, the temporary stop display pattern “G3” shown in FIG. “TP4” indicates “after reach” in the third temporary stop display. The lower part of FIG. 38A (after the change) changes the effect mode of the main notice effect of the third pseudo-ream from “re” to “blue” and changes the effect form of the main notice effect of the second pseudo-ream. The storage contents in the RAM 122 after changing from “re” to “blue” are schematically shown. In the upper part to the lower part of FIG. 38A, the effect mode of the main announcement effect of the third pseudo-ream is changed from “re” to “blue”, and the effect mode of the main effect of the second pseudo-ream is “re To "blue".

  For example, when it is determined that the prohibition condition 3-40 is established in the process of step S730 (step S730; Yes), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The effect mode of the main notice effect of the second pseudo-stop (before the second temporary stop display) is changed from “re” to “blue”, From “red” to “blue”, the effect mode of the main notice effect of the first pseudo-series (before the first temporary stop display) is changed from “red” to “blue” (step S731).

  The upper part of FIG. 38B (before the change / when the condition is satisfied) schematically shows the contents stored in the RAM 122 by the main notice pattern “G3-YP14” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP8”. That is, “red” in the “notice” column under the “first pseudo continuous fluctuation” column is “red” before the first temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP14” shown in FIG. “Red” in the “notice” column under the “second pseudo continuous variation” column indicates “red” before the second temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP14” shown in FIG. “Re” in the “Notice” column under the “Pseudo Fluctuation 3rd” column indicates “Re” before the third temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP14” shown in FIG. “Red” in the “Notice” column under the “After third quasi-continuous change” column indicates “Red” after the third temporary stop display of the main notice pattern “G3-YP14” shown in FIG. Is shown. Also, “after reach” in the “temporary stop” column under the “first pseudo continuous fluctuation” column is the first temporary stop display of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP8” shown in FIG. “After reach” and “After reach” in the “Temporary stop” column under the “Second pseudo-variation” column are “After reach” of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP8” shown in FIG. “After reach” of the second temporary stop display is shown, and “After reach” in the “Temporary stop” column under the “Third-time pseudo continuous fluctuation” column is the temporary stop display pattern shown in FIG. “After reach” of the third temporary stop display of “G3-TP4” is shown. The interruption (after change (1)) in FIG. 38 (B) schematically shows the contents stored in the RAM 122 after changing the effect mode of the main notice effect of the third pseudo-ream from “re” to “blue”. Represents. The lower part of FIG. 38B (after change (2)) changes the effect mode of the main notice effect of the second pseudo-ream from “red” to “blue” and changes the main notice effect of the first pseudo-ream. The storage contents in the RAM 122 after the effect mode is changed from “red” to “blue” are schematically shown. In the upper part to the lower part of FIG. 38 (B), the effect mode of the main announcement effect of the third pseudo-ream is changed from “re” to “blue”, and the effect mode of the main effect of the second pseudo-ream is “red” From “red” to “blue”.

  When it is determined in step S721 not to perform the quasi-continuation (step S721: No), an effect mode of other effects is determined (step S725). For example, in step S720, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute effects such as roulette effects and slips based on the fluctuation patterns in the low base state ("PA1-1" to "PB5-5" in FIG. 6). Therefore, when it is determined in step S721 not to perform the pseudo-ream, an effect mode of effects such as roulette effect and slip is determined. Further, for example, in step S720, the effect control CPU 120 performs the battle-related effect (“PA-T1”) based on the variation pattern in the high base state (“PA-T1” to “PB-KW2” in FIG. 7). If it is determined in step S721 that no pseudo-ream is performed, the effect aspect of the effect regarding the battle may be determined by the same method as in step S722, for example. The effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the determination content determined in step S 725 in the RAM 122.

  After executing the process of step S725, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the effect mode of the main notice effect in other cases (step S726). In other words, the production control CPU 120 produces a main notice effect production mode according to the production mode determined in step S725 (for example, a production mode of a production such as a roulette production or a slide, a production mode of a production related to a battle, etc.). May be determined by the same method as in step S723, for example. The effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the determination content determined in step S723 in the RAM 122.

  After executing the processing of step S731 and step S726, or when it is determined in step S730 that the prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S730; No), an effect control pattern is set (step S740).

  When the process of step S740 is executed subsequent to step S730 (No), the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect (pseudo-continuous effect) based on the variation pattern determined in step S720, or the temporary stop display determined in step S722 The effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the temporary stop display by the pattern and the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the main notice effect by the main notice pattern determined in step S723 are set as the use pattern (step S740). Then, the effect control pattern setting process (step S710) ends. When a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the effect based on the variation pattern determined in step S720 are prepared, any one is selected and set as a use pattern. The same applies to the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the temporary stop display by the temporary stop display pattern determined in step S722 and the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the main notice effect based on the main notice pattern determined in step S723. .

  When the process of step S740 is executed subsequent to step S731, the temporary control display pattern determined in step S722 or the temporary stop display pattern determined in step S722 is provisional based on the production based on the variation pattern determined in step S720 (pseudo continuous production). An effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the stop display or an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode after the change changed in step S731 with respect to the effect mode of the main notice effect based on the main notice pattern determined in step S723 is used as the use pattern. Set (step S740). Then, the effect control pattern setting process (step S710) ends. When a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the effect based on the variation pattern determined in step S720 are prepared, any one is selected and set as a use pattern. The same applies to the effect control pattern corresponding to the temporarily stopped display effect mode determined in step S722 and the effect control pattern corresponding to the changed effect mode changed in step S731.

  When the process of step S740 is executed subsequent to step S726, the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect based on the variation pattern determined in step S720 (effect other than the pseudo-continuous effect) or the effect mode determined in step S725 is used. The corresponding effect control pattern and the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the main notice effect determined in step S726 are set as usage patterns (step S740). Then, the effect control pattern setting process (step S710) ends. When a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the effect based on the variation pattern determined in step S720 are prepared, any one is selected and set as a use pattern. The same applies to the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the effect determined in step S725 and the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the main notice effect determined in step S726.

  Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  On the main board 11 side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 determines the first reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number when the first start condition is established by the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening. Is updated (steps S301 and S302). The CPU 103 updates the second reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number when the second starting condition is established by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting prize port or the third starting prize port ( Steps S301 and S302). When the current gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 103 selects the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8A, and when the current gaming state is the probability change state, the CPU 103 selects FIG. B), the special figure display result determination table is selected. Based on the selected special figure display result determination table and the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the special figure display result is displayed as “ It is determined whether or not “big hit” is set (step S403). Further, the CPU 103 determines that the jackpot type is “first hit” based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8C and the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is determined whether the first big hit (15R probability change), the second big hit (10R probability change) or the third big hit (10R normal change) is set (step S409). Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines a variation category according to the gaming state or the like (step S412), and then executes a command control process (step S17), etc. A symbol designation command, a variation category command, a reserved memory count notification command, and the like are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the main board 11 side, when the start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 determines, in the special symbol normal process (step S110), that the special figure display result is “big hit” as in the case where the start condition is satisfied. Is determined (step S240), and the jackpot type is determined in the same manner as when the start condition is satisfied (step S244). Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the CPU 103 determines the variation category (step S261) and determines the variation pattern according to the variation category (step S262) as when the start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S17) and the like, and when the start condition is satisfied, the variation pattern designation command and the like are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the side of the production control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the production control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the hold storage in the winning production decision process (step S150) when the start condition is satisfied (step S162).

  On the side of the effect control board 12, when the start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step S710). In the process of step S710, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the type of effect of the change based on the change pattern (step S720). When the pseudo-continuous effect is determined in step S720 (step S721; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode (“normal” or “after reach”) of the temporary stop display of the pseudo-continuous effect (step S722). Then, an effect mode (“blue”, “red”, or “re”) of the main notice effect to be executed before each temporary stop display is determined (step S723). Then, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not a predetermined prohibition condition is satisfied in the determination result of step S722 (effect mode of temporary stop display) and the determination result of step S723 (effect mode of the main notice effect). (Step S730). If it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied (step S730; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 changes the content determined in step S723 (the effect mode of the main notice effect) (step S731). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern as a use pattern (step S740). For example, when the effect mode of the main notice effect is changed in step S731, the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect (pseudo-continuous effect) based on the variation pattern determined in step S720, or the temporary stop display pattern determined in step S722 An effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the temporary stop display by, and an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode after change changed in step S731 with respect to the effect mode of the main notice effect based on the main notice pattern determined in step S723 are used. The pattern is set (step S740).

  39 and 40 are diagrams showing an example of the display operation in the image display device 5. FIG. Specifically, in FIGS. 39 and 40, the display operation in the case where the pseudo continuous effect of the pseudo continuous variation number “3” is determined (step S720) and the prohibition condition 3-9 is satisfied (step S730; Yes). Show. 39 and 40, the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” is determined (step S722) in the effect control pattern setting process (step S710) shown in FIG. 29, and the main notice pattern “G3-YP7”. (Step S723), and as shown in FIG. 37A, the effect mode of the main notice effect of the third pseudo-ream (before the third temporary stop display) is changed from “re” to “blue”. An example of the display operation when the effect mode of the main notice effect of the second pseudo-series (before the second temporary stop display) is changed from “red” to “blue” (step S731) is shown in FIG. ) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (f) → (g) → (h) → (i) → (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (d) in FIG. f) → (g) → (h) → (i) → (j) in time series. Note that an arrow “↓” in FIG. 39B and FIG. 40A indicates that the decorative symbol is variably displayed. In FIGS. 39 and 40, the hold display, the display of the current display area, and the like are omitted.

  (A) of FIG. 39 is a scene in which the fixed decorative symbols (“3” “5” “1”) are displayed. (B) of FIG. 39 is a scene in which the variable display of the decorative design in which the above-described pseudo continuous effect is executed is started and the main notice effect is executed. In (b) of FIG. 39, the main notice effect based on the effect mode “blue” before the first temporary stop display in the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” determined in step S723 is executed. 39 (c) to 39 (e) are scenes from the non-reach to the temporary stop display of the chance symbol “opportunity”. In (c) to (e) of FIG. 39, temporary stop display based on the rendering mode “normal” of the first temporary stop display in the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” determined in step S722 is executed. (F) of FIG. 39 is a scene in which the decorative display variable display is started again and the main notice effect is executed. In (f) of FIG. 39, the main notice based on “blue” changed in step S731 instead of the presentation mode “red” before the second temporary stop display in the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” determined in step S723. Production is being performed. 39 (b) to (f), the variable display started in FIG. 39 (b) temporarily stops in FIG. 39 (e), that is, temporarily stops (decorative symbol display area). The chance symbol “opportunity” is stopped at 5C, or the combination including the chance symbol “opportunity” in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is stopped), and restarted at (f) in FIG.

  (G) to (i) in FIG. 39 are scenes from the non-reach to the temporary stop display of the chance symbol “opportunity”. In (g) to (i) of FIG. 39, temporary stop display based on the rendering mode “normal” of the second temporary stop display in the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” determined in step S722 is executed. FIG. 40 (a) following FIG. 39 (i) is a scene in which the variable symbol display is started again and the main notice effect is being executed. In (a) of FIG. 40, the main notice based on “blue” changed in step S731 instead of the presentation mode “re” before the third temporary stop display in the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” determined in step S723. Production is being performed. According to (a) of FIG. 39 to (a) of FIG. 40, the variable display started (restarted) in (f) of FIG. 39 temporarily stops in (i) of FIG. ).

  40B to 40E are scenes from reaching the reach to temporarily displaying the chance symbol “opportunity”. In (b) to (e) of FIG. 40, the temporary stop display based on the rendering mode “after reach” of the third temporary stop display in the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2” determined in step S722 is executed. . (F) of FIG. 40 is a scene where the decorative display variable display is started again and the main notice effect is executed. In (f) of FIG. 40, the main notice effect based on the effect mode “red” after the third temporary stop display in the main notice pattern “G3-YP7” determined in step S723 is executed. 40 (b) to 40 (f), the variable display started (restarted) in FIG. 40 (a) temporarily stops in FIG. 40 (e), and (f) in FIG. ).

  (G)-(j) of FIG. 40 is an example after (f) of FIG. For example, if the change is based on a change pattern belonging to the change category (PA4, PA5, PB4, PB5) of super reach, the change is made to super reach as shown in (g) to (j) of FIG. Develop.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40, it is possible to execute an effect without increasing the data capacity. In addition, since the number of tables to be prepared is reduced, it is easy to adjust reliability in the development stage.

  In the above, when the prohibition condition is satisfied (when the combination of the temporary stop display pattern determined in step S722 and the combination of the main notice pattern determined in step S723 matches any of the prohibition condition combinations) Although it has been described that the determination content of step S723 (the effect mode of the main notice effect) is changed, the determination content of step S722 (the effect mode of the temporary stop display) may be changed.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the change of the determination content as another example. FIG. 41A shows the contents of change when each prohibition condition is satisfied when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “1”. FIG. 41A shows that when the prohibition condition 1-1 is satisfied, the effect of the first temporary stop display is changed from “after reach” to “normal”, or when the prohibition condition 1-2 is satisfied. This represents that the effect mode of the temporary stop display for the second time is changed from “after reach” to “normal”.

  When the prohibition condition 1-1 or the prohibition condition 1-2 is satisfied, the first temporary stop display effect mode is changed from “after reach” to “normal”, so that the first time that occurred before the change Pseudo-ream inconsistencies are resolved.

  FIG. 41B shows the contents of change (partial) when each prohibition condition is satisfied when the number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation is “3”. FIG. 41B shows, as an example of the content of the change, that when the prohibition condition 3-1 is satisfied, the effect mode of the third temporary stop display is changed from “after reach” to “normal”, or the prohibition condition 3- When 2 is established, the effect mode of the third temporary stop display is changed from “after reach” to “normal”, and when the prohibition condition 3-9 is satisfied, the effect mode of the third temporary stop display is set to “reach”. “After” is changed to “normal”, and when the prohibition condition 3-10 is satisfied, the third temporary stop display effect mode is changed from “after reach” to “normal”, or the prohibition condition 3-33 When is established, the effect mode of the third temporary stop display is changed from “after reach” to “normal”, and the effect mode of the second temporary stop display is changed from “after reach” to “normal”. Or when the forbidden condition 3-40 is satisfied, It represents that it will change the performance aspect of the stop display from the "Reach" to "normal".

  For example, when the prohibition condition 3-1 or the prohibition condition 3-2 is established, the effect mode of the third temporary stop display is changed from “after reach” to “normal”, which occurs before the change. The mismatch of the third pseudo-ream is eliminated. In addition, for example, when the prohibition condition 3-33 is satisfied, the second and third temporary stop display effects are changed from “after reach” to “normal”, thereby causing the second time that occurred before the change. The mismatch of the third pseudo-ream is eliminated.

  FIG. 42 is another specific example of the change of the determination content (specific example of the change based on the change content of FIG. 41). For example, when the prohibition condition 1-1 shown in FIG. 41 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode of the temporary stop display of the first pseudo-continuous as “after reach” as shown in FIG. Change from “Normal” to “Normal”. Further, for example, when the prohibition condition 3-33 shown in FIG. 41 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), the effect mode of the temporary stop display of the second and third pseudo-continuations. Is changed from “After reach” to “Normal”. For example, when the prohibition condition 3-40 shown in FIG. 41 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode of the temporary stop display of the third pseudo-continuation as “reach” as shown in FIG. Change from “After” to “Normal”.

  Further, in the above, when the temporary stop display effect mode in the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect is “after reach”, the temporary stop display effect mode in the subsequent number of times of the pseudo continuous effect is “normal”. Although there is a temporary stop display pattern (temporary stop display patterns “G3-TP3”, “G3-TP5”, “G3-TP6”, “G3-TP7”) including You may restrict | limit so that the fall of a display may not arise. The fall of the temporary stop display simply means that when the temporary stop display effect mode at the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect is “after reach”, the temporary stop display effect mode at the number of times after that of the pseudo continuous effect. Is “normal”. However, the temporary stop display effect mode may also be related to the jackpot reliability in the same manner as the main notice effect mode. In other words, the reliability of the production mode “red” of the main notice effect is set higher than the reliability of the production mode “blue”. Similarly, the reliability of the production mode “after reach” of the temporary stop display is the same. May be higher than the reliability of the production mode “normal”.

  FIG. 43A is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern when the temporary stop display pattern is limited so as not to fall. In FIG. 43A, there is no temporary stop display pattern (temporary stop display patterns “G3-TP3”, “G3-TP5”, “G3-TP6”, and “G3-TP7”) in which the temporary stop display falls. Each of the temporary stop display patterns (temporary stop display patterns “G3-TP1”, “G3-TP2”, “G3-TP4”, and “G3-TP8”) shown in FIG. Each of the temporary stop display patterns shown in FIG. “G3T1 ′” in FIG. 43A is the determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP1”. “G3T2 ′” is a determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2”. “G3T4 ′” is the determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4”. “G3T8 ′” is a determination ratio of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP8”. “G3T1 ′” + “G3T2 ′” + “G3T4 ′” + “G3T8 ′” = 100. In other words, for 100 possible values of the random value MR7 for determining the effect mode of the temporary stop display (100 values of “0” to “99” described above), G3T1 ′ pieces of the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP1”. Is assigned, G3T2 ′ is assigned to the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP2”, G3T4 ′ is assigned to the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4”, and G3T8 ′ is assigned to the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP8”. Are assigned. The same applies when the pseudo continuous fluctuation count is “2” or the pseudo continuous fluctuation count is “4”.

  In step S722 of FIG. 29, the effect control CPU 120 causes the temporary stop display pattern (G3-TP1, “G3-TP2,” “G3” as shown in FIG. 43A) to prevent the temporary stop display from falling. If any one of -TP4 "and" G3-TP8 ") is determined, it is possible to prevent the temporary stop display from falling at the stage of determining the temporary stop display pattern.

  FIG. 43B shows a prohibition condition (a prohibition condition when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is “3”) when limiting to prevent the temporary stop display from falling. The same applies when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “2” or the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “4”.

  FIG. 44 shows changes (partial) when a prohibition condition (a prohibition condition when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”) is satisfied when a mode is set such that the fall of the temporary stop display does not occur. Represents. For example, when the prohibition condition 3-2 is satisfied and the fall of the temporary stop display is not limited, as shown in FIG. 41B, the third temporary stop display effect mode is changed from “after reach” to “normal”. However, when the fall of the temporary stop display is limited, as shown in FIG. 44, the presentation mode of the second and third temporary stop displays is changed from “after reach” to “normal”. . The same applies when the prohibition condition 3-10 is satisfied. Further, for example, when the prohibition condition 3-40 is satisfied, if the fall of the temporary stop display is not limited, the effect mode of the third temporary stop display is changed from “after reach” as shown in FIG. Although only changing to “normal”, when limiting the fall of the temporary stop display, as shown in FIG. 44, the effect mode of the first, second, and third temporary stop display is set to “after reach”. Change from “Normal” to “Normal”.

  FIG. 45 is another specific example of the change of the determination content (specific example of the change by the change content of FIG. 44). For example, when the prohibition condition 3-10 shown in FIG. 44 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode of the temporary stop display of the second and third pseudo-continuations as shown in FIG. Change from “After reach” to “Normal”. For example, when the prohibition condition 3-40 shown in FIG. 44 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 displays the temporary stop display of the first, second, and third pseudo-continuations as shown in FIG. 45 (B). Is changed from “after reach” to “normal”.

  Moreover, you may restrict | fall the fall between the production | presentation aspect of a temporary stop display, and the production | presentation aspect of a main announcement effect. Specifically, a prohibition condition may be provided in consideration of the fall between the temporary stop display effect mode and the main notice effect effect mode, and the contents of change when the prohibition condition is satisfied may be defined. Note that the fall between the temporary stop display effect mode and the main notice effect effect mode is, for example, when the temporary stop display effect mode is “after reach” at a certain number of pseudo-continuous effects. The effect mode of the main notice effect in the number of times after the continuous effect is “blue”. Alternatively, in addition to or in addition to the above, when the effect mode of the main notice effect at the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect is “red”, the effect mode of the temporary stop display at the number of times is “normal”. It may be referred to as a fall between the temporary stop display effect mode and the main notice effect effect mode.

  FIG. 46 is another specific example of the change of the determination content (specific example of the change when the fall between the effect mode of the temporary stop display and the effect mode of the main notice effect is limited). For example, when the prohibition condition 3-33 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode of the main notice effect of the second and third pseudo-continuations from “re” to “3” as shown in FIG. The display mode may be changed to “blue” and the second temporary stop display effect may be changed from “after reach” to “normal”. In FIG. 46 (A), when the effect mode of the temporary stop display of the second pseudo-ream is “after reach”, the effect mode of the main notice effect of the third pseudo-ream is not “blue”. The effect mode of the temporary stop display of the second pseudo-continuation is changed from “after reach” to “normal”.

  When the main notice pattern “G3-YP2” and the temporary stop display pattern “G3-TP4” are determined, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The display mode may be changed from “after reach” to “normal”. In FIG. 46B, the temporary stop display effect of the second quasi-continuous display is changed from “after reach” to “normal”, so that the temporary stop display effect that was originally generated (before the change) is generated. Decrease between the mode and the main notice effect production mode (the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop display effect mode is “after reach” and the third pseudo-run main notice effect production mode is “blue”. ) Is eliminated. In FIG. 46B, it goes without saying that after the change, even before the change, there is no so-called barre, no fall of the main notice effect, and no fall of the temporary stop display.

  As described above, as one aspect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols such as decorative symbols and chance symbols) that can be identified, and displays the display results ( For example, it is advantageous for the player when a specific display result (for example, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a big hit combination) is derived and displayed on variable display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol. A game machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and a predetermined repetitive effect (for example, FIG. 39) from when variable identification information is displayed until the display result is derived and displayed. 40, the first variable display in FIG. 39 (b) to the first temporary stop display in FIG. 39 (e), the second variable display in FIG. 39 (f) (the first re-variable display). Display)-Fig. 3 (I) second temporary stop display, FIG. 40 (a) third variable display (second revariable display) to FIG. 40 (e) third temporary stop display, FIG. (F) fourth variable display (third revariable display) to etc.) are repeatedly executed a plurality of times (for example, in the example of FIGS. 39 and 40, the number of revariable display is three times). , A repeated notification effect for notifying that the repeated effect is repeated when the repeated effect is repeated (for example, an effect of temporarily stopping and displaying a specific chance symbol “opportunity” as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, etc. ) Is executed repeatedly (for example, the process of step S720 for determining the type of effect such as the pseudo-continuous effect based on the variation pattern, the process of step S722 for determining the temporary stop display pattern, and the main notice pattern are determined. Step S723 Based on the settings of the variable display start setting process (step S171) including the effect control pattern determination process (step S710) for executing the process and the like, the variable display effect process for executing the pseudo-continuous effect as shown in FIGS. (Step S172) and the like, and first determination means (for example, a temporary stop display pattern) for determining the effect mode (for example, the effect mode “normal”, the effect mode “after reach”, etc.) of the repeated notification effect. Step S722 to be performed) and an effect mode of the notice effect (for example, the effect mode “blue”, the effect mode “red”, the effect mode “re”, etc.) executed in a plurality of repeated effects are determined. Second determination means (for example, the process of step S723 for determining the main notice pattern), the first determination result by the first determination means, and the second determination means by the second determination means; 2 in the determination result (for example, a prohibition condition based on a combination of the main notice pattern and the temporary stop display pattern shown in FIG. 33, FIG. 34, FIG. 43B, etc.). Specifically, when the first ballet indicating that the pseudo-continuation continues, the fall of the main notice effect or the variable display effect, or the like is established, either the first determination result or the second determination result Result change means (for example, the process of step S731 for changing the main notice effect or the temporary stop display effect as shown in FIGS. 35, 41, 44, etc.).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to execute an effect without increasing the data capacity. In addition, since the number of tables to be prepared is reduced, it is easy to adjust reliability in the development stage.

  Further, the prohibition condition includes at least the effect form of the repeated notification effect executed in the repeated effect of a certain number of times based on the first determination result, and the number of times of the repeat determination effect based on the second determination result. This is established when the effect mode of the notice effect executed in the repeated effect is not consistent. For example, as shown in FIG. 33, FIG. 34, FIG. 43 (B), etc., when there is a mismatch between the main notice effect effect mode and the temporary stop display effect mode in any number of pseudo-reams To establish. For example, this is established when the main notice effect has a “re” effect mode and the temporary stop display effect mode is “after reach”.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably determine inconsistency.

  In addition, when the result changing means changes one of the first determination result and the second determination result with respect to a plurality of repetition effects, the plurality of repetitions. One of the determination results may be changed in order from the subsequent repeated effects in the start order of effects. For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), FIG. 37 (B), FIG. 45 (A), FIG. 45 (B), and FIG. You may change the production | presentation aspect of a stop display.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to maintain the reliability of the production mode with high reliability (for example, the production mode “red” of the main notice production and the production mode “after reach” of the temporary stop display). The decision result can be changed.

  In addition, when the determination change unit changes the determination result of either the first determination result or the second determination result for the certain number of repetition effects, the change result of the number of times And the first determination result or the second determination result for the repetitive effect earlier than the number of times, and if the prohibition condition is satisfied, The start order changes either the first determination result or the second determination result with respect to the previous repeated effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (A) and FIG. 37 (B), when the effect mode of the main announcement effect of the third pseudo-ream is changed from “re” to “blue”, the second time is changed by the change. Since the prohibition condition (the fall of the main notice effect) is established in the pseudo-series, the effect mode of the main notice effect of the second pseudo-series is changed from “red” to “blue”. For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), when the presentation mode of the temporary stop display of the third pseudo-continuation is changed from “after reach” to “normal”, the prohibition condition (temporary stop) is changed by the change. The display mode of the second pseudo-continuous stop display is changed from “after reach” to “normal”. For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), when the presentation mode of the temporary stop display of the third pseudo-continuation is changed from “after reach” to “normal”, the prohibition condition (temporary stop) is changed by the change. Therefore, the presentation mode of the temporary stop display of the first and second pseudo-continuations is changed from “after reach” to “normal”. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 46A, when changing the presentation mode of the main announcement effect of the third pseudo-ream from “re” to “blue”, the prohibition condition (temporary stop display) Therefore, the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop display effect mode is changed from “after reach” to “normal”.

  According to the said structure, it can change suitably.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not repeat the repeated effect, the effect mode of the repeat notification effect and the effect mode up to the middle are common, and the special effect that notifies that the repeated effect is not repeated. Special effect execution means for executing (pseudo-continuous effect) (for example, in the variable display of decorative symbols by the variation patterns “PA4-2”, “PB4-2”, “PA5-2”, “PB5-2”) The step S720 of determining to execute the continuous gas effect, etc.), and the prohibition condition is the repeat notification effect executed in the repeated effect of a certain number of times according to the first determination result. An effect mode (for example, an effect mode) for notifying that the repeated effect is repeated after the effect mode is notified by the same effect mode as the special effect that the repeated effect is not repeated. After the reach, etc., and the rendition effect is repeated as the effect mode of the notice effect executed in the repetitive effect of the number of times according to the second determination result. This is established when an effect mode (for example, an effect mode “re”) is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 34 and the like, in the same number of pseudo-reams, the first determination result indicates that the chance symbols are temporarily stopped after reaching and the pseudo-ream continues, and the chance symbols are temporarily stopped after reaching. The pseudo-continuation display mode “after reach” is determined, in which the pseudo-continuation ends and the reach continues without displaying, and the second determination result suggests that the pseudo-continuation continues. The prohibition condition is established when the production mode “re” of the main notice effect is determined. In other words, in the same number of pseudo-reams, the prohibition condition is satisfied when the effect mode “re” for the main notice effect and the effect mode “after reach” for the temporary stop display are combined.

  According to the said structure, the interest of a game can be raised.

  In addition, the production mode “after reach” is to continue the pseudo-run after pretending that the pseudo-run does not continue by becoming reach once, and has a part of the reach production, but the production mode “normal” There is no reach production that the production mode “after reach” has. In other words, in the combination of the production mode “re” for the main notice effect and the production mode “after reach” for the temporary stop display, there will be a short run that the chance symbol stops and the pseudo-continuation continues in the reach production. In the combination of the production mode “re” of the main notice effect and the production mode “normal” of the temporary stop display, at least the chance that the chance symbol stops in the reach production and the pseudo-continuation continues (in other words, There is no chance that the reach production will be frustrating. In other words, the influence of the previous ballet caused by the combination of the main notice effect effect mode “re” and the temporary stop display effect mode “normal” is the main notice effect effect mode “re” and the temporary stop display effect mode “after reach”. Is less than the influence of the first ballet caused by the combination. Therefore, the combination of the production mode “re” for the main notice effect and the production mode “after reach” for the temporary stop display is prohibited, and the combination of the production mode “re” for the main notice effect and the production mode “normal” for the temporary stop display. Is excluded from the prohibited conditions.

  Further, it is only necessary that at least one of the various types of temporary stop display effect modes does not satisfy the prohibition condition in combination with the main notice effect effect mode “re”. For example, when there are three types of “post-reach”, “normal (short)”, and “normal (long)” as the temporary stop display effects, the main notice effect is displayed in the same number of pseudo-reams. When the combination of the production mode “re” and the temporary stop display production mode “after reach”, or the combination of the main notice presentation production mode “re” and the temporary stop display production mode “normal (long)” The forbidden condition may be satisfied when it becomes. Note that “normal (long)” has a more dramatic production (eg, a greater degree of resentment) or longer production time than “normal (short)”.

  Further, the prohibition condition is a ratio controlled by the specific gaming state suggested by the effect form of the repeated notification effect executed in the repeated effect of a certain number of times according to the first determination result, It may be established when the ratio controlled to the specific gaming state suggested by the effect mode of the notice effect executed in the repeated effect of the number of times determined by the second determination result is significantly different. For example, as shown in FIG. 46, the prohibition condition is satisfied when the reliability of the effect mode “blue” of the notice effect is greatly different from the reliability of the effect mode “after reach” of the temporary stop display. In addition, the determination result may be changed. In the middle part of FIG. 46A (after change (1)), the temporary stop display effect mode “after reach” in the second pseudo-continuation → the effect mode “blue” of the notice effect in the third pseudo-ream Therefore, as shown in the lower part (after change (2)), the effect mode of the temporary stop display in the second pseudo-continuous is changed from “after reach” to “normal”. The same applies to FIG.

  It should be noted that a plurality of types of effect modes “re” for the main notice effect may be provided. For example, two types of effect modes “weak re” and effect modes “strong re” with different jackpot reliability may be provided. Both “weak re” and “strong re” suggest continuation of the pseudo-ream, but the reliability of “strong re” is higher than the reliability of “weak re”. When the reliability of the production mode of the main notice effect is “strong re”> “weak re” and the reliability of the production mode of the temporary stop display is “after reach”> “normal” {the number of times The production mode “strong re” of the pseudo-annual main notice effect → the production mode “normal”} of the pseudo-continuous temporary stop display after the number of times and the number of times may be set as the prohibition condition.

  In addition, the prohibition condition includes the ratio controlled to the specific gaming state suggested by the effect mode of the notice effect performed in a certain number of repeated effects based on the second determination result, and the first It may be established when the ratio controlled to the specific gaming state suggested by the effect mode of the repeated notification effect executed in the repeated effect after the number of times determined by the determination result is greatly different. Good. For example, when the reliability level of the temporary stop display effect mode “normal” and the reliability level of the red notification effect mode “red” are significantly different from each other, The production mode “normal”} of the temporary stop display of the “red” → the number of times and the number of times after the number of times may be set as the prohibition condition.

  Further, as described above, when the reliability of the effect mode of the main notice effect is “strong re”> “weak re” and the reliability of the effect mode of the temporary stop display is “after reach”> “normal” , {The appearance mode of the temporary stop display of a certain number of pseudo-continuations “after reach” → the effect mode of the main announcement effect of the pseudo-continuations after the number of times may be set as a prohibition condition.

  In the above-described embodiment, “red”, “blue”, “re (weak re, strong re)”, etc. are exemplified as the main notice production effects. Is not limited to this. In addition, although “normal (short, long)”, “after reach” and the like are illustrated as the temporary stop display effect modes, the types and number of temporary stop display effect modes are not limited thereto.

  In addition, the main notice effect may not be executed. That is, a main notice pattern including an effect mode “none” indicating that the main notice effect is not executed may be provided. For example, in the pseudo continuous fluctuation count “1” shown in FIG. 31, the main notice effect presentation mode “None” before the first temporary stop display is set to “none”. The main notice pattern of “blue” or the main notice pattern of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display is “no” and the main notice pattern of the main notice effect after the first temporary stop display is “red”. May be provided. The jackpot reliability may be, for example, the production mode “red”> the production mode “blue”> the production mode “none”.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the production aspect of the main notice effect before the last temporary stop display and the production aspect of the main notice effect after the last temporary stop display are determined collectively, the last temporary stop display The effect mode of the previous main notice effect and the effect mode of the main notice effect after the last temporary stop display may be determined separately. That is, in the example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation number “3” shown in FIG. 32, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display, the effect mode of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display, The main notice pattern including the effect mode of the main notice effect before the third temporary stop display and the effect form of the main notice effect after the temporary stop display of the effect form of the main notice effect after the third temporary stop display is determined. However, instead of this, the production mode of the main notice effect before the first temporary stop display, the production mode of the main notice effect before the second temporary stop display, and the third mode before the temporary stop display. The first main notice pattern including the main notice effect effect form is determined, and separately, the main notice effect effect form after the temporary stop display of the main notice effect effect form after the third temporary stop display is performed. The second main notice pattern to be determined may be determined.

  In addition, it has been described that the main notice effect in the case of pseudo-ream is, for example, a serif effect or a window effect. There is no particular limitation as long as the effect mode “re” can be realized, such as an effect of cut-in and an effect of a character (single or group) passing on the screen. For example, the plurality of types of cut-in images only need to include at least one that suggests the continuation of the pseudo-continuation. Further, for example, it is only necessary to include at least one that suggests the continuation of pseudo-continuations among the plurality of types of passing characters.

  In addition, although the example of performing the variable display after temporarily stopping displaying the symbol (chance symbol) indicating that the quasi-continuation continues in the decoration symbol display area, the symbol indicating that the quasi-continuation continues is used in the decoration symbol display area. Alternatively, the variable display may be performed again without displaying the temporary stop. Specifically, the re-variable display may be started after performing some effect that informs the player that the pseudo-ream will continue. For example, the re-variable display may be performed after an effect that the display screen is crushed like glass is executed.

  That is, the repeated notification effect executed by the repeated effect executing means of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment is not limited to the effect of temporarily stopping the chance symbol, and other effects (for example, the display screen is like glass). It may be a crushing production). Note that when the repeated notification effect is another effect, the first determining means may determine an effect mode corresponding to the other effect. For example, when the repeated notification effect is an effect in which the above-described display screen is crushed like glass, for example, an effect mode “normal” that can be crushed without repeated hits, an effect mode “after repeated hits” that is crushed after repeated hits, etc.) May be determined. In addition, when there are “normal” and “after repeated hits” as the effect mode of the repeated notification effect, for example, the combination of the effect mode “after the repeated hit” and the effect mode “re” of the main notice effect is prohibited. May be set. In addition, when “after repeated hits” is set as an effect mode of the repeated notification effect, it is preferable to provide an effect mode that does not break even if repeated hits are performed as a special effect (pseudo continuous gasse effect).

  The correspondence relationship between the variation category and the jackpot in FIGS. 9 and 10 is an example. For example, according to FIG. 10, when winning in a disadvantageous effect (strong enemy battle), it is not a second big hit (10R probability change), and when winning in an advantageous effect (weak enemy battle), it is not a first big hit (15R probability change). Although it does not become, even if it wins by disadvantageous production (strong enemy battle) and wins by advantageous production (weak enemy battle), it seems that it can be the first big hit (15R probability change) or the second big hit (10R probability change). It may be. Further, according to FIG. 10, when winning with a disadvantageous production (strong enemy battle) that is difficult to win, there are more expected balls than when winning with an advantageous production (weak enemy battle), but with a disadvantageous production (strong enemy battle) Even if you win, you can have the same expected ball when you win with an advantageous performance (weak enemy battle), even if you win with an adverse performance (strong enemy battle), you win with an advantageous performance (weak enemy battle) Expected to be less than expected.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the pseudo | simulation continuous effect is performed in a normal state, you may make it perform also in a probability change state similarly to a normal state.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the kind of effect is determined in the effect control board 12 side (step S720 of FIG. 29), you may determine the kind of effect in the main board | substrate 11 side. Specifically, if a variation pattern is finely provided for each type of effect and the variation pattern is determined on the main board 11 side, the type of effect may be uniquely specified from the variation pattern.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the effect aspect of the main notice effect in the pseudo | simulation continuous effect, and the effect aspect of a temporary stop display, it is applicable also to what is called a look-ahead continuous effect. For example, when the second target is reserved, the main display effect mode and the stop mode display mode (for example, continuous display mode) in the variable display before the target variable display and the variable display of the target. For the production mode that suggests continuation), the same control as in the case of the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations “1” may be executed. In addition, when the fourth target is held, the variable display three times before the variable display of the target, the variable display two times before the variable display of the target, the variable display one before the variable display of the target, and For the effect mode of the main notice effect and the effect mode of the stop display (for example, an effect mode that suggests continuation of the continuous effect) in the four variable displays of the target variable display, You may perform control similar to the case.

  In the above description, it has been described that the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. However, the data need not necessarily be stored in a table format (for example, a structure, an array, etc.). For example, each of the special figure display results ("big hit" and "losing") is compared with a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result so that the determination ratio shown in FIG. (Determined value) may be stored in the ROM 101 in the form of a table, but information for determining a special figure display result at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. The ROM 101 may store a mathematical expression or program that outputs any special figure display result when a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR1 is input. In addition, the data does not necessarily have to be stored together in the ROM 101. That is, the above-described structures, arrays, mathematical formulas, programs, and the like may be distributed (stored) in a plurality of locations in the ROM 101. In addition, it has been described that the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The data in the ROM 121 is the same as the data in the ROM 101.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal winning ball device 6B are arranged below the sorting device 200, but the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6D are arranged below the sorting device 200. (Not shown) may be arranged. That is, the normal variable winning ball device 6D may be arranged at the position of the normal winning ball device 6B instead of the normal winning ball device 6B. Even if there is a navel prize (winning from the top not picked up by the movable wing piece) for the normal variable winning ball device 6C, an electric support prize (winning from the side picked up by the movable wing piece at the tilting position) is received. In the same manner, the second start condition is satisfied. Similarly, if the second start condition is satisfied for the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6D even if there is a navel win or an electric support win. Good. When the normal winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6D are arranged below the distribution device 200, the normal variable winning ball device 6C may not be arranged. When the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is not arranged, the passing gate 41 may be provided on the left side instead of the right side of the image display apparatus 5, or may be provided on both sides.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the distribution apparatus 200 is arrange | positioned, the distribution apparatus 200 does not need to be arrange | positioned. For example, instead of the distribution device 200, the normal winning ball device 6A, and the normal winning ball device 6B, a normal variable winning ball device 6E (not shown) may be disposed below the image display device 5. The first start condition may be satisfied when the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6E receives a navel prize, and the second start condition may be satisfied when an electric support prize is received. When the normal variable winning ball device 6E is arranged instead of the distribution device 200, the normal winning ball device 6A, and the normal winning ball device 6B, the normal variable winning ball device 6C may not be arranged. When the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is not arranged, the passing gate 41 may be provided on the left side instead of the right side of the image display apparatus 5, or may be provided on both sides.

  In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the player makes a right turn in the high base state, but does not have to make a right turn as long as the player can benefit from electric support in the high base state. For example, when the normal variable winning ball device 6E is arranged below the image display device 5 without arranging the normal variable winning ball device 6C on the right side of the image display device 5, it is not always necessary to make a right hand. .

  In the above embodiment, a predetermined number of time reductions may be added in the case of an uncertain big hit (third big hit).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the weak enemy battle demonstrated that it was an advantageous production which is easy to be controlled to a certain variation state compared with a strong enemy battle, and a strong enemy battle is an unfavorable production which is easily controlled to a normal state compared with a weak enemy battle. In other words, the distinction between “advantageous production” and “unfavorable production” is related to the establishment / non-establishment of special conditions (in other words, the percentage), in other words, the probability variation big hit / non-probable big hit distinction (ratio) to be derived later. there were. However, the distinction between “advantageous production” and “disadvantageous production” is not limited to those related to the probability variation big hit / non-probable variation big hit derived later. For example, as long as some difference is generated in the number of balls to be played thereafter, it may be other than those related to probability variation big hit / non-probability big hit derived later.

  As an example, a gaming machine that shifts to a fixed number of times (for example, X times including the first time) after a predetermined big hit (for example, up to X times, always in a probable state after a big hit (or with a very high probability) In the case of a controlled gaming machine or the like, the distinction between “advantageous production” and “disadvantageous production” may be related to the magnitude of the number of rounds of big hits in the extended villa mode. Specifically, for example, a battle mode in which four more jackpots are played after the first hit of a specific symbol (for example, 10R jackpots when winning in each battle of 1-4 times, 2R when losing In a game machine having a big win (Battle Mode), “Advantage” is a weak enemy battle that is more easily controlled by 10R big hit than a strong enemy battle, and “Adverse effect” is easier to control by 2R big hit than a weak enemy battle. It may be a strong enemy battle.

  In addition, a game score for use in a game is given by using the number of game values having a size specified by the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, and the given game The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a score or a game score given by winning a game.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for deriving and displaying the display results. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  In the above embodiment, the change is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (effect control CPU 120) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo-ream. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is sometimes transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) uses the first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. Is a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop, and the second command has reached a reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect. May be configured to transmit a command indicating the variation time and variation mode after the so-called second stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 100, the change time is notified by each of two commands, and the specific control mode executed at each timing is selected by the production control microcomputer. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a predetermined time elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 47 to FIG. 56, a description will be given of a control in which a plurality of character images on which the same character is displayed are arranged and the color of the character is smoothly changed by changing the transparency. FIG. 47 schematically shows a color space by additive color mixing as an example of the color space. Each of the hexagonal cells in FIG. 47 represents a different color. Hereinafter, the cell “W1” represents the color “W1”. The same applies to other cells. In FIG. 47, for convenience of explanation, the number of colors (the number of cells) is limited. However, it is needless to say that more colors than those shown in FIG. 47 can actually be handled.

  Ten types of color “W1”, color “W2”,..., Color “W6”, and color “W10” illustrated in the center are white colors. The color “W1” located in the center is a white center color (so-called pure white). The color “W8” is greenish white, the color “W9” is reddish white (reddish white), and the color “W10” is bluish white (blued white). The color “G1”, the color “G2”,..., The color “G14”, and the color “G15” illustrated in the upper part of the white system are green (RGB G) colors. The color “G11” located in the center is the green center color. The color “G1” or the like is blueish green (blue is strong green). The color “G7” is reddish green (reddish green). The color “R1”, the color “R2”,..., The color “R14”, and the color “R15” illustrated in the lower right portion of the white color are red (RGB R) colors. The color “R11” located in the center is a red center color. The color “R1” is greenish red. The color “R7” is a bluish red. The 15 types of the color “B1”, the color “B2”,..., The color “B14”, and the color “B15” illustrated in the lower left portion of the white color are blue (RGB B) colors. The color “B11” located in the center is a blue center color. The color “B1” is reddish blue. The color “B7” or the like is greenish blue. The eight types of color “Y1”, color “Y2”,..., Color “Y7”, and color “Y8” illustrated in the upper right portion of the white color are yellow colors. The color “Y3” located near the center is the center of yellow. The color “Y1” or the like is greenish yellow. The color “Y5” or the like is reddish yellow. The eight types of color “M1”, color “M2”,..., Color “M7”, and color “M8” illustrated in the lower part of the white color are magenta colors. The color “M3” located near the center is the center of magenta. The color “M1” is magenta with a reddish color. The color “M5” is magenta with a blue color. The eight types of the color “C1”, the color “C2”,..., The color “C7”, and the color “C8” illustrated in the upper left portion of the white color are cyan colors. The color “C3” located near the center is the center of cyan. The color “C1” is blueish cyan. The color “C5” etc. is greenish cyan. The 36 types of color “K1”, color “K2”,..., Color “K35”, and color “K36” illustrated in the peripheral portion are black colors. The colors “K31” to “K36” and the colors “K1” to “K7” adjacent to the green color are greenish black. The color “K31” is a blackish greenish and blueish. The color “K7” is black with a greenish color and a reddish color. The colors “K7” to “K19” adjacent to the red system are reddish black. The color “K19” is reddish and blueish black. The colors “K19” to “K31” adjacent to the blue color are blackish blue. The color “K31” is black with blue and greenish.

  FIG. 48 is a simplified character image. A1 to a3 and b1 to b3 around the image 1-1 in FIG. 48A are coordinates for specifying each region of the image 1-1. That is, the image 1-1 includes a region (a1, b1), a region (a1, b2), a region (a1, b3), a region (a2, b1), a region (a2, b2), a region (a2, b3), Nine areas are defined: area (a3, b1), area (a3, b2), and area (a3, b3). The same applies to a1 to a3 and b1 to b3 around the image 1-2 in FIG.

  The characters described in each area of the image 1-1 in FIG. 48A are the colors of the area when the image 1-1 is displayed alone and with a transparency of 0% (non-transparent) (shown in FIG. 47). Color). For example, the character “G11” described in the upper left area (a1, b1) of the image 1-1 is displayed when the image 1-1 is displayed alone with a transparency of 0% (non-transparent). a1 and b1) are displayed in the color “G11” shown in FIG. In addition, for example, the character “G6” described in the central area (a2, b2) of the image 1-1 is displayed when the image 1-1 is displayed alone and with a transparency of 0% (non-transparent). (A2, b2) indicates that the color “G6” shown in FIG. 47 is displayed. Further, for example, the character “Y7” described in the lower right area (a3, b3) of the image 1-1 is displayed when the image 1-1 is displayed alone and with a transparency of 0% (non-transparent). This represents that the area (a3, b3) is displayed in the color “Y7” shown in FIG.

  The characters described in each area of the image 1-2 in FIG. 48B are the colors of the area when the image 1-2 is displayed alone and with a transparency of 0% (non-transparent) (shown in FIG. 47). Color). For example, the character “Y7” described in the upper left area (a1, b1) of the image 1-2 is displayed when the image 1-2 is displayed alone with a transparency of 0% (non-transparent). a1 and b1) are displayed in the color “Y7” shown in FIG. Further, for example, the character “R2” described in the center area (a2, b2) of the image 1-2 is displayed when the image 1-2 is displayed alone and with a transparency of 0% (non-transparent). (A2, b2) indicates that the color “R2” shown in FIG. 47 is displayed. Further, for example, the character “R11” described in the lower right region (a3, b3) of the image 1-2 is displayed when the image 1-2 is displayed alone and with a transparency of 0% (non-transparent). This represents that the area (a3, b3) is displayed in the color “R11” shown in FIG.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a change in color by the first transmittance control method and the first transmittance control method. FIG. 49A shows a control method (first transparency control method) in which the transparency of an image is gradually changed from 0% (non-transmission) to 100% (complete transmission). At time “Ta1”, the image 1-1 (transparency “0 (%)”) of FIG. 48 (A) is superimposed on the front surface of the image 1-2 (transparency “0%”) of FIG. 48 (B). Arrange. Thereafter, the transparency of the image 1-1 is changed from “0% (non-transparent)” so that the transparency of the image 1-1 arranged on the front side becomes “100% (complete transmission)” at the time “Ta5”. It is gradually increased (for example, at a constant rate). For example, when the time between time “Ta1” and time “Ta5” (“Ta1” to “Ta5”) is equally divided into four times “Ta2”, time “Ta3”, and “Ta4” The transparency of the image 1-1 gradually increases from 0% (non-transmission) to 25% over time ("Ta1" to "Ta2") and from 25% over time ("Ta2" to "Ta3"). Gradually increase to 50%, gradually increase from 50% to 75% over time ("Ta3" to "Ta4"), 75% to 100% over time ("Ta4" to "Ta5") (complete transmission) Gradually increase. Note that the transparency of the image 1-2 arranged on the back side is not changed (the transparency of the image 1-2 is “0% (non-transparent)” in time (“Ta1” to “Ta5”)). Is).

  FIG. 49B shows a change in color of each region by the first transmittance control method shown in FIG. Each region (region (a1, b1), region (a1, b2), region (a1, b3),..., Region (a3, b3)) in FIG. 49B is the same as each region in FIG. . Each time (“Ta1”, “Ta2”, “Ta3”, “Ta4”, “Ta5”) in FIG. 49B is the same as each time in FIG. 49A.

  At time “Ta1”, the transparency of the image 1-1 disposed on the front side is 0% (non-transparent), so the image 1-2 disposed on the back side is not visible at all, and FIG. The color of the image 1-1 shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 49B, at the time “Ta1”, the region (a1, b1) is displayed with the color “G11”, the region (a1, b2) is displayed with the color “G5”, and the region ( a1, b3) is displayed in color “G6”, the region (a2, b1) is displayed in color “G5”, the region (a2, b2) is displayed in color “G6”, and the region (a2, b3) is displayed The color “Y6” is displayed, the region (a3, b1) is displayed with the color “G6”, the region (a3, b2) is displayed with the color “Y6”, and the region (a3, b3) is displayed with the color “Y7”. Is displayed.

  At the time “Ta5”, the transparency of the image 1-1 arranged on the front side is 100% (complete transmission), so the image 1-1 arranged on the front side cannot be seen at all, and FIG. The color of the image 1-2 shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 49B, at time “Ta5”, the region (a1, b1) is displayed with the color “Y7”, the region (a1, b2) is displayed with the color “Y8”, and the region ( a1, b3) are displayed with the color “R2”, the regions (a2, b1) are displayed with the color “Y8”, the regions (a2, b2) are displayed with the color “R2”, and the regions (a2, b3) are displayed. The color “R3” is displayed, the region (a3, b1) is displayed with the color “R2”, the region (a3, b2) is displayed with the color “R3”, and the region (a3, b3) is displayed with the color “R11”. Is displayed.

  Further, during the time between the time “Ta1” and the time “Ta5” (“Ta1” to “Ta5”), the color of each region is smoothly changed from the color at the time “Ta1” to the color at the time “Ta5”. Change.

  For example, the colors of the regions (a1, b1) are the color “G11” at the time “Ta1”, the color “G5” at the time “Ta2”, the color “G6” at the time “Ta3”, and the color “Y6” at the time “Ta4”. ”, The color“ Y7 ”at time“ Ta5 ”, and smoothly changes from a green color to a yellow color (see FIGS. 49B and 47). Note that the transparency of the image 1-1 at time “Ta2” is 25% as described above. However, when the transparency of the image 1-1 is 25%, the region (a1, b1) of the image 1-1 The influence of the color “G11” is weakened by the transparency “25%” and the influence of the color “Y7” of the area (a1, b1) of the image 1-2 is increased by the transparency “25%”. The region (a1, b1) in “” is assumed to have the color “G5”. Further, the transparency of the image 1-1 at the time “Ta3” is 50% as described above. However, when the transparency of the image 1-1 is 50%, the area (a1, b1) of the image 1-1 is set. The influence of the color “G11” is weakened by the transparency “50%” and the influence of the color “Y7” of the area (a1, b1) of the image 1-2 is increased by the transparency “50%”. The region (a1, b1) in “” is assumed to have the color “G6”. Further, the transparency of the image 1-1 at the time “Ta4” is 75% as described above. However, when the transparency of the image 1-1 is 75%, the region (a1, b1) of the image 1-1 is displayed. The influence of the color “G11” is weakened by the transparency “75%” and the influence of the color “Y7” of the area (a1, b1) of the image 1-2 is increased by the transparency “75%”. It is assumed that the area (a1, b1) in “” has the color “Y6”.

  The colors of the regions (a2, b2) are the color “G6” at the time “Ta1”, the color “Y6” at the time “Ta2”, the color “Y7” at the time “Ta3”, and the color “Y8” at the time “Ta4”. ”, Color“ R2 ”at time“ Ta5 ”, and smoothly changes from a green (yellowish green) color to a red (orange) color (see FIG. 49B and FIG. 47). ). When the transparency of the image 1-1 is 25%, the influence of the color “G6” of the area (a2, b2) of the image 1-1 is weakened by the transparency “25%” and the area of the image 1-2. It is assumed that the influence of the color “R2” of (a2, b2) is increased by the transmittance “25%”, and as a result, the region (a2, b2) at the time “Ta2” is the color “Y6”. When the transparency of the image 1-1 is 50%, the influence of the color “G6” of the area (a2, b2) of the image 1-1 is reduced by the transparency “50%” and the area of the image 1-2 It is assumed that the influence of the color “R2” of (a2, b2) is increased by the transmittance “50%”, and as a result, the region (a2, b2) at the time “Ta3” is the color “Y7”. When the transparency of the image 1-1 is 75%, the influence of the color “G6” of the area (a2, b2) of the image 1-1 is weakened by the transparency “75%” and the area of the image 1-2. It is assumed that the influence of the color “R2” of (a2, b2) is increased by the transmittance “75%”, and as a result, the region (a2, b2) at the time “Ta4” is the color “Y8”.

  The color of the area (a3, b3) is the color “Y7” at the time “Ta1”, the color “Y8” at the time “Ta2”, the color “R2” at the time “Ta3”, and the color “R3” at the time “Ta4”. ”, The color“ R11 ”at time“ Ta5 ”, and smoothly changes from a yellow color to a red color (see FIGS. 49B and 47). When the transparency of the image 1-1 is 25%, the influence of the color “Y7” of the area (a3, b3) of the image 1-1 is weakened by the transparency “25%” and the area of the image 1-2. It is assumed that the influence of the color “R11” of (a3, b3) is increased by the transmittance “25%”, and as a result, the region (a3, b3) at the time “Ta2” is the color “Y8”. When the transparency of the image 1-1 is 50%, the influence of the color “Y7” of the area (a3, b3) of the image 1-1 is weakened by the transparency “50%” and the area of the image 1-2. It is assumed that the influence of the color “R11” of (a3, b3) is increased by the transmittance “50%”, and as a result, the region (a3, b3) at the time “Ta3” is the color “R2”. When the transparency of the image 1-1 is 75%, the influence of the color “Y7” of the area (a3, b3) of the image 1-1 is weakened by the transparency “75%” and the area of the image 1-2. It is assumed that the influence of the color “R11” of (a3, b3) is increased by the transmittance “75%”, and as a result, the region (a3, b3) at the time “Ta4” is the color “R3”.

  As described above, when the image 1-1 and the image 1-2 are overlapped and controlled by the first transparency control method, the color is the color of the image on the front side (image 1-1) (image 1-1). The color of the image on the back side (image 1-2) (image 1-2 alone and with transparency 0%) (from the color when the image 1-1 is displayed alone and with transparency 0% (non-transparent)) The color changes smoothly to (color) when displayed in (non-transparent).

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a color change by the second transmittance control method and the second transmittance control method. FIG. 50A shows a control method (second transparency control method) in which the image transparency is gradually changed from 100% (complete transmission) to 0% (non-transmission). At time “Ta1”, the image 1-1 (transmittance “100 (%)”) in FIG. 48A is superimposed on the front surface of the image 1-2 (transmittance “0%”) in FIG. 48B. Arrange. Thereafter, the transparency of the image 1-1 is changed from “100% (complete transmission)” so that the transparency of the image 1-1 arranged on the front side becomes “0% (non-transmission)” at the time “Ta5”. Decreasing gradually (for example, at a constant rate). For example, when the time between time “Ta1” and time “Ta5” (“Ta1” to “Ta5”) is equally divided into four times “Ta2”, time “Ta3”, and “Ta4” The transparency of the image 1-1 gradually decreases from 100% (complete transmission) to 75% in time ("Ta1" to "Ta2") and from 75% in time ("Ta2" to "Ta3"). Gradually decreases to 50%, gradually decreases from 50% to 25% over time ("Ta3" to "Ta4"), and decreases from 25% to 0% over time ("Ta4" to "Ta5") Gradually decreases. Note that the transparency of the image 1-2 arranged on the back side is not changed (the transparency of the image 1-2 is “0% (non-transparent)” in time (“Ta1” to “Ta5”)). Is).

  FIG. 50B shows a change in color of each region by the second transmittance control method shown in FIG. Each region (region (a1, b1), region (a1, b2), region (a1, b3),..., Region (a3, b3)) in FIG. 50B is the same as each region in FIG. . Each time (“Ta1”, “Ta2”, “Ta3”, “Ta4”, “Ta5”) in FIG. 50B is the same as each time in FIG.

  At the time “Ta1”, the transparency of the image 1-1 arranged on the front side is 100% (complete transmission), so the image 1-1 arranged on the front side is not visible at all, and FIG. The color of the image 1-2 shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 50B, at the time “Ta5”, the area (a1, b1) is displayed with the color “Y7”, the area (a1, b2) is displayed with the color “Y8”, and the area ( a1, b3) are displayed with the color “R2”, the regions (a2, b1) are displayed with the color “Y8”, the regions (a2, b2) are displayed with the color “R2”, and the regions (a2, b3) are displayed. The color “R3” is displayed, the region (a3, b1) is displayed with the color “R2”, the region (a3, b2) is displayed with the color “R3”, and the region (a3, b3) is displayed with the color “R11”. Is displayed.

  At time “Ta5”, the transparency of the image 1-1 disposed on the front side is 0% (non-transparent), and therefore the image 1-2 disposed on the back side is not visible at all, and FIG. The color of the image 1-1 shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 50B, at time “Ta1”, the region (a1, b1) is displayed with the color “G11”, the region (a1, b2) is displayed with the color “G5”, and the region ( a1, b3) is displayed in color “G6”, the region (a2, b1) is displayed in color “G5”, the region (a2, b2) is displayed in color “G6”, and the region (a2, b3) is displayed The color “Y6” is displayed, the region (a3, b1) is displayed with the color “G6”, the region (a3, b2) is displayed with the color “Y6”, and the region (a3, b3) is displayed with the color “Y7”. Is displayed.

  Further, during the time between the time “Ta1” and the time “Ta5” (“Ta1” to “Ta5”), the color of each region is smoothly changed from the color at the time “Ta1” to the color at the time “Ta5”. Change.

  For example, the color of the region (a1, b1) is the color “Y7” at the time “Ta1”, the color “Y6” at the time “Ta2”, the color “G6” at the time “Ta3”, and the color “G5” at the time “Ta4”. ”, The color“ G11 ”at time“ Ta5 ”, and smoothly changes from a yellow color to a green color (see FIGS. 50B and 47). Further, for example, the color of the region (a2, b2) is the color “R2” at the time “Ta1”, the color “Y8” at the time “Ta2”, the color “Y7” at the time “Ta3”, and the color “Y” at the time “Ta4”. Y6 ”, color“ G6 ”at time“ Ta5 ”, and smoothly changes from a red (orange) color to a green (yellowish green) color (FIG. 50B, FIG. 47). reference). Further, for example, the color of the region (a3, b3) is the color “R11” at the time “Ta1”, the color “R3” at the time “Ta2”, the color “R2” at the time “Ta3”, and the color “R2” at the time “Ta4”. The color is “Y7” at time “Ta8” and time “Ta5”, and smoothly changes from a red color to a yellow color (see FIGS. 50B and 47).

  As described above, when the image 1-1 and the image 1-2 are overlapped and controlled by the second transmittance control method, the color is the color of the image (image 1-2) on the back side (image 1-2). The color of the image on the front side (image 1-1) (image 1-1 alone and with transparency 0% (non-transparent)). The color changes smoothly to (Color) when displayed in (Transparent).

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a character image. FIG. 51A is an example of a character image displaying a “kimono character” that is a woman wearing a kimono. FIG. 51B shows each area of the kimono character in the character image shown in FIG. 51A (each of a plurality of areas constituting the kimono character). For example, in FIG. 51B, a region “15” is a skirt region of a kimono character and a region “17” is a face region of the kimono character.

  FIG. 52 is an example of three types of character images. The character image (image 2-1) shown in FIG. 52A is obtained by using the kimono character shown in FIG. 51 as the first color. The character image (image 2-2) shown in FIG. 52B is obtained by using the kimono character of FIG. 51 as the second color. The character image (image 2-3) shown in FIG. 52C is obtained by using the kimono character of FIG. 51 as the third color. In other words, the character image (image 2-1) in FIG. 52A is the kimono character in FIG. 51 when the character image (image 2-1) is displayed alone and with a transparency of 0% (non-transparent). Is displayed in the first color. The character image (image 2-2) in FIG. 52B is the second image of the kimono character in FIG. 51 when the character image (image 2-2) is displayed alone and with a transparency of 0% (non-transparent). It is displayed in color. The character image (image 2-3) in FIG. 52C is the third image of the kimono character in FIG. 51 when the character image (image 2-3) is displayed alone and with a transparency of 0% (non-transparent). It is displayed in color. That is, in the character image (image 2-1) in FIG. 52A, the character image (image 2-2) in FIG. 52B, and the character image (image 2-3) in FIG. Are the same in size and shape and differ only in color.

  The color of the kimono portion in the image 2-1 in FIG. 52A is from green to red from the top to the bottom. For example, the upper part of the kimono is green (for example, the region “2” is a color “G5”, the region “3” is a color “G11”, the region “4” is a color “G5”, etc.) Yellow color (for example, area “7” is color “G4”, area “8” is color “Y7”, area “9” is color “Y7”, etc.), and the lower part of the kimono is red color (for example, area “12” "Is the color" R11 ", and the region" 15 "is the color" R4 ").

  The color of the kimono portion in the image 2-2 in FIG. 52B is from red to blue from the top to the bottom. For example, the upper part of the kimono is red (for example, the region “2” is a color “R5”, the region “3” is a color “R11”, the region “4” is a color “R5”, etc.) The magenta system (for example, the region “7” is the color “R4”, the region “8” is the color “M7”, the region “9” is the color “M7”, etc.), and the lower part of the kimono is blue (for example, the region “12” "Is the color" B11 ", the area" 15 "is the color" B4 ", etc.).

  The color of the kimono portion in the image 2-3 in FIG. 52C is from blue to green from the top to the bottom. For example, the upper part of the kimono is blue (for example, the region “2” is the color “B5”, the region “3” is the color “B11”, the region “4” is the color “B5”, etc.) Cyan (for example, area “7” is color “B4”, area “8” is color “C7”, area “9” is color “C7”, etc.), and the lower part of the kimono is green (for example, area “12” "Is the color" G11 ", the area" 15 "is the color" G4 ", etc.).

  In the image 2-1 in FIG. 52A, the image 2-2 in FIG. 52B, and the image 2-3 in FIG. 52C, portions other than the kimono have the same color. For example, the hair portion (region “16”) has the color “K9” in any of the image 2-1, the image 2-2, and the image 2-3. Further, the face, neck, hand, and leg portions (region “17”, region “18”, region “19”, region “20”, region “21”) are image 2-1, image 2-2, image In any of 2-3, the color is “R4”.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first transparency control method using three types of character images. 53A and 53B are sequentially arranged by superposing any two of the three types of character images (image 2-1, image 2-2, image 2-3 in FIG. 52). (Both transparency “0%”), a control method (first transparency control method) for gradually changing the transparency of the character image arranged on the front side from 0% (non-transmission) to 100% (complete transmission) ). FIG. 53B is a continuation of FIG.

  At the time “Tb1” shown in FIG. 53A, the image 2-1 (transmittance “0”) in FIG. 52A is placed in front of the image 2-2 (transmittance “0%”) in FIG. (%) ") Are superimposed. Thereafter, the transparency of the image 2-1 is changed from “0% (non-transparent)” so that the transparency of the image 2-1 arranged on the front side becomes “100% (complete transmission)” at the time “Tb2”. It is gradually increased (for example, at a constant rate).

  At time “Tb2” shown in FIG. 53A, the image 2-1 having the transparency of “100% (completely transmissive)” is deleted (the image 2-2 maintains the arrangement) and the image 2- An image 2-3 (transparency “0 (%)”) in FIG. 52C is superimposed on the back surface of 2 (transparency “0%”). Thereafter, the transparency of the image 2-2 is changed from “0% (non-transparent)” so that the transparency of the image 2-2 arranged on the front side becomes “100% (complete transmission)” at the time “Tb3”. It is gradually increased (for example, at a constant rate).

  At time “Tb3” shown in FIG. 53A, the image 2-2 having the transparency of “100% (complete transmission)” is deleted (the image 2-3 is maintained in the arrangement) and the image 2- The image 2-1 (transparency “0 (%)”) in FIG. 52A is superimposed on the back surface of 3 (transparency “0%”). Thereafter, the transparency of the image 2-3 is changed from “0% (non-transparent)” so that the transparency of the image 2-3 arranged on the front side becomes “100% (complete transmission)” at the time “Tb3”. It is gradually increased (for example, at a constant rate).

  At time “Tb4” shown in FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (B), the image 2-3 having the transparency of “100% (complete transmission)” is deleted (the image 2-1 maintains the arrangement), and An image 2-2 (transparency “0 (%)”) in FIG. 52B is superimposed on the back of the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”). Thereafter, the transparency of the image 2-1 is changed from “0% (non-transparent)” so that the transparency of the image 2-1 arranged on the front side becomes “100% (complete transmission)” at the time “Tb5”. It is gradually increased (for example, at a constant rate).

  At time “Tb5” shown in FIG. 53B, the image 2-1 having the transparency of “100% (completely transmissive)” is deleted (the image 2-2 is maintained in the arrangement) and the image 2- An image 2-3 (transparency “0 (%)”) in FIG. 52C is superimposed on the back surface of 2 (transparency “0%”). Thereafter, the transparency of the image 2-2 is changed from “0% (non-transparent)” so that the transparency of the image 2-2 arranged on the front side becomes “100% (complete transmission)” at the time “Tb6”. It is gradually increased (for example, at a constant rate).

  At the time “Tb6” shown in FIG. 53B, the image 2-2 whose transparency is “100% (complete transmission)” is deleted (the image 2-3 is maintained in the arrangement) and the image 2- The image 2-1 (transparency “0 (%)”) in FIG. 52A is superimposed on the back surface of 3 (transparency “0%”). Thereafter, the transparency of the image 2-3 is changed from “0% (non-transparent)” so that the transparency of the image 2-3 arranged on the front side becomes “100% (complete transmission)” at the time “Tb7”. It is gradually increased (for example, at a constant rate).

  That is, the time between the time “Tb4” and the time “Tb5” (“Tb4” to “Tb5”) is controlled by the time between the time “Tb1” and the time “Tb2” (“Tb1” to “Tb2”). The time between the time “Tb5” and the time “Tb6” (“Tb5” to “Tb6”) is controlled in the time between the time “Tb2” and the time “Tb3” (“Tb2”). To “Tb3”), and the control of the time (“Tb6” to “Tb7”) between the time “Tb6” and the time “Tb7” is performed between the time “Tb3” and the time “Tb4”. This is similar to the control of time (“Tb3” to “Tb4”). The same applies after time “Tb7”. Note that the arranged images (two of the images 2-1 to 2-3) may be deleted at a predetermined end time.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a color change by the first transparency control method using three types of character images. FIG. 54B is a continuation of FIG. Each region (region “1” to region “21”) in FIGS. 54A and 54B is the same as each region in FIG. Each time in FIGS. 54A and 54B (time “Tb1” to time “Tb7”) is the same as each time in FIGS. 53A and 53B.

  At time “Tb1”, the transparency of the image 2-1 disposed on the front side is 0% (non-transparent), and therefore the image 2-2 disposed on the back side is not visible at all, and FIG. The color of the image 2-1 shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54A, at the time “Tb1”, for example, the region “1” and the region “3” constituting the kimono portion are displayed in the color “G11”, and the region “2” "And the area" 4 "are displayed with the color" G5 ", and the areas" 6 "and" area 7 "are displayed with the color" G4 ". In addition, the region “16” constituting the portion other than the kimono portion is displayed with the color “K9”, and the regions “17” to “21” are displayed with the color “R4”.

  At time “Tb2”, the transparency of the image 2-2 arranged on the front side is 0% (non-transparent), so the image 2-3 arranged on the back side is not seen at all, and FIG. The color of the image 2-2 shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54A, at the time “Tb2”, for example, the region “1” and the region “3” constituting the kimono portion are displayed in the color “R11”, and the region “2” "And the area" 4 "are displayed with the color" R5 ", and the areas" 6 "and" area 7 "are displayed with the color" R4 ". In addition, the region “16” constituting the portion other than the kimono portion is displayed with the color “K9”, and the regions “17” to “21” are displayed with the color “R4”.

  At time “Tb3”, the transparency of the image 2-3 arranged on the front side is 0% (non-transparent), so the image 2-1 arranged on the back side is not seen at all, and FIG. The color of the image 2-3 shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54A, at the time “Tb3”, for example, the region “1” and the region “3” constituting the kimono portion are displayed in the color “B11”, and the region “2” "And the area" 4 "are displayed with the color" B5 ", and the areas" 6 "and" area 7 "are displayed with the color" B4 ". In addition, the region “16” constituting the portion other than the kimono portion is displayed with the color “K9”, and the regions “17” to “21” are displayed with the color “R4”.

  The display color at time “Tb4” is the same as the display color at time “Tb1” as shown in FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (B). The display color at time “Tb5” is the same as the display color at time “Tb2”, as shown in FIG. The display color at time “Tb6” is the same as the display color at time “Tb3”, as shown in FIG. The display color at time “Tb7” is the same as the display color at time “Tb1” as shown in FIG.

  In addition, during the time between time “Tb1” and time “Tb2” (“Tb1” to “Tb2”), the color of each region constituting the kimono portion changes from the color at time “Tb1” to the time “Tb2”. The color changes smoothly. For example, the colors of the region “1” and the region “3” are the color “G11” → the color “G5” → the color “G6” → the color “Y6” → the color “Y7” in time (“Tb1” to “Tb2”). ”→ color“ Y8 ”→ color“ R2 ”→ color“ R3 ”→ color“ R11 ”, and the color is smoothly changed from a green color to a red color (FIG. 54A). 47). Further, for example, the color of the region “10” is the color “Y3” → the color “Y4” → the color “Y5” → the color “R4” → the color “M1” → the color “time” in time (“Tb1” to “Tb2”). From “M2” to “M3”, the color smoothly changes from a yellow color to a magenta color (see FIGS. 54A and 47). Further, for example, the colors of the region “11” and the region “12” are the color “R11” → the color “R5” → the color “R6” → the color “M6” → the color “in time” (“Tb1” to “Tb2”). M7 ”→ color“ M8 ”→ color“ B2 ”→ color“ B3 ”→ color“ B11 ”, and the color smoothly changes from a red color to a blue color (FIG. 54A). (See FIG. 47). In addition, the color of each area | region which comprises other than a kimono part has not changed (refer FIG. 54 (A) and FIG. 47).

  In addition, during the time between time “Tb2” and time “Tb3” (“Tb2” to “Tb3”), the color of each region constituting the kimono portion changes from the color at time “Tb2” to the time “Tb3”. The color changes smoothly. For example, the colors of the region “1” and the region “3” are the color “R11” → the color “R5” → the color “R6” → the color “M6” → the color “M7” in time (“Tb2” to “Tb3”). ”→ color“ M8 ”→ color“ B2 ”→ color“ B3 ”→ color“ B11 ”, and the color smoothly changes from a red color to a blue color (FIG. 54A). 47). Further, for example, the color of the region “10” is the color “M3” → the color “M4” → the color “M5” → the color “B4” → the color “C1” → the color “time” in time (“Tb2” to “Tb3”). From “C2” to “C3”, the color is smoothly changed from a magenta color to a cyan color (see FIGS. 54A and 47). Further, for example, the colors of the region “11” and the region “12” are the color “B11” → the color “B5” → the color “B6” → the color “C6” → the color “in time” (“Tb2” to “Tb3”). The color is smoothly changed from a blue color to a green color, such as “C7” → color “C8” → color “G2” → color “G3” → color “G11” (FIG. 54A). (See FIG. 47). In addition, the color of each area | region which comprises other than a kimono part has not changed (refer FIG. 54 (A) and FIG. 47).

  In addition, during the time between time “Tb3” and time “Tb4” (“Tb3” to “Tb4”), the color of each region constituting the kimono portion changes from the color at time “Tb3” to the time “Tb4”. The color changes smoothly. For example, the colors of the region “1” and the region “3” are the color “B11” → the color “B5” → the color “B6” → the color “C6” → the color “C7” in time (“Tb3” to “Tb4”). ”→ color“ C8 ”→ color“ G2 ”→ color“ G3 ”→ color“ G11 ”, and the color is smoothly changed from a blue color to a green color (FIG. 54A). 47). Further, for example, the color of the region “10” is the color “C3” → the color “C4” → the color “C5” → the color “G4” → the color “Y1” → the color “in time” (“Tb3” to “Tb4”) The color is smoothly changed from a cyan color to a yellow color as “Y2” → color “Y3” (see FIGS. 54A and 47). Further, for example, the colors of the region “11” and the region “12” are the color “G11” → the color “G5” → the color “G6” → the color “Y6” → the color “Y” in time (“Tb3” to “Tb4”) Y7 ”→ color“ Y8 ”→ color“ R2 ”→ color“ R3 ”→ color“ R11 ”As shown in FIG. 54A, the color is smoothly changed from a green color to a red color. (See FIG. 47). In addition, the color of each area | region which comprises other than a kimono part has not changed (refer FIG. 54 (A) and FIG. 47).

  As shown in FIG. 54B, the change in display color in the time between the time “Tb4” and the time “Tb5” (“Tb4” to “Tb5”) is the time (“Tb1” to “Tb2”). This is the same as the change in display color. As shown in FIG. 54B, the change in display color during the time between the time “Tb5” and the time “Tb6” (“Tb5” to “Tb6”) is the time (“Tb2” to “Tb3”). This is the same as the change in display color. As shown in FIG. 54B, the change in display color in the time between the time “Tb6” and the time “Tb7” (“Tb6” to “Tb7”) is the time (“Tb3” to “Tb4”). This is the same as the change in display color.

  FIG. 55 is an example of colors obtained using the above-described three types of character images (image 2-1, image 2-2, and FIG. 2-3). FIG. 55A shows colors between the image 2-1 and the image 2-2. That is, it represents the color of the character image (kimono character) at a certain time (almost intermediate time) within the time (“Tb1” to “Tb2”) between the time “Tb1” and the time “Tb2”. FIG. 55B shows colors between the image 2-2 and the image 2-3. That is, it represents the color of the character image (kimono character) at a certain time (almost intermediate time) within the time (“Tb2” to “Tb3”) between the time “Tb2” and the time “Tb3”. FIG. 55C shows colors between the image 2-3 and the image 2-1. That is, it represents the color of the character image (kimono character) at a certain time (almost intermediate time) within the time (“Tb3” to “Tb4”) between the time “Tb3” and the time “Tb4”.

That is, by performing the control shown in FIG. 53, the color of the kimono character is changed to [color shown in FIG. 52A (color of image 2-1) → color shown in FIG. 55A (image 2). -1 and image 2-2) → color shown in FIG. 52B (color of image 2-2) → color shown in FIG. 55B (image 2-2 and image 2-3). 52) → Color shown in FIG. 52C (color of image 2-3) → Color shown in FIG. 55C (color between image 2-3 and image 2-1) →
Color shown in FIG. 52A (color of image 2-1) → Color shown in FIG. 55A (color between image 2-1 and image 2-2) → shown in FIG. 52B. The color changes smoothly and cyclically in the color space, such as “color (color of image 2-2) →.

  Note that the color changes cyclically in the color space, regardless of the color at the start of change or the color at the end of change in the color space shown in FIG. For example, [Green color → Yellow color → Red color → Magenta color → Blue color → Cyan color → Green color →…] or [Cyan color → Blue color → Magenta color → Red color → Yellow color → Green color → Cyan color →…], the color changes cyclically. included. In addition, even when the color does not change in some systems, it is included in the fact that the color changes cyclically. For example, [Green color → Red color → Blue color → Green color →…] or [Cyan color → Magenta color → Yellow color → Cyan color] ...] is also included in the cyclical change in color. In addition, the case where the color changes in a part of the system is included in the fact that the color changes cyclically. For example, in a green color, [color “G5” → color “G4” → color “G3” → color “G10” → color “G15” → color “G12” → color “G5” → ...] In the case of white color and yellow color, [color “W3” → color “Y4” → color “Y3” → color “Y2” → color “W3” →.. It is included in changing to. In addition, a case where a white color or a black color is included is also included in the fact that the color changes cyclically. For example, [black color (eg, greenish color “K1”, etc.) → black color (eg, reddish color “K13”, etc.) → black color (eg, blueish color “K25”, etc.) ) → Black color (for example, greenish color “K1”, etc.) → ...] or [White color (for example, greenish color “W8”, etc.) → Cyan color → White color Color (for example, bluish color “W10”, etc.) → Magenta color → Red color (for example, reddish color “W9”) → Yellow color → White color (for example, greenish color “W10”) W8 ”etc.) →... Is also included in the color change cyclically.

  The production control CPU 120 may execute the process of FIG. 53 in the following steps Sa1 to Sa5 in accordance with the production control pattern. Note that the three types of character images (image 2-1, image 2-2, image 2-3) in FIG. 53 are displayed in advance (display order “1”, display order “2”, display order “3”). ) Is set in the ROM 121 or the like referred to based on the effect control pattern or the effect control pattern. For example, it is assumed that the image 2-1 is set as the display order “1”, the image 2-1 is set as the display order “2”, and the image 2-3 is set as the display order “3”.

Step Sa1: Two types of character images are selected based on the display order among the three types of character images. For example, among the three types of character images, the image 2-1 having the display order “1” and the image 2-1 having the display order “2” are selected. When step Sa1 ends, the process proceeds to step Sa2.

Step Sa2: Based on the display order, two types of character images are arranged so that the kimono characters overlap. Further, the transparency of the character image arranged on the front surface and the transparency of the character image arranged on the back surface are set to “0%”. For example, the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) with the display order “1” is the front, the image 2-2 (transparency “0%”) with the display order “2” is the back, and the image 2-1. The image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) and the image 2-2 are overlapped so that the kimono character of (transparency “0%”) and the kimono character of the image 2-2 (transparency “0%”) overlap. (Transparency “0%”) is placed on top of each other. When step Sa2 ends, the process proceeds to step Sa3.

Step Sa3: The transparency of the character image arranged on the front is controlled from “0%” to “100%” (the transparency (“0%”) of the character image arranged on the back is maintained). For example, when the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the front and the image 2-2 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the back, the image arranged on the front The transmissivity of 2-1 is controlled from “0%” to “100%” (the transmissivity (“0%”) of the image 2-2 arranged on the back surface is maintained). Note that the color of the kimono character smoothly changes from the color of the image 2-1 to the color of the image 2-2 by the control. When the image 2-2 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the front surface and the image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the back surface, the image 2- 2 is controlled from “0%” to “100%” (the transparency (“0%”) of the image 2-3 arranged on the back surface is maintained). Note that the color of the kimono character smoothly changes from the color according to the image 2-2 to the color according to the image 2-3 by the control. When the image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the front surface and the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the back surface, the image 2- 3 is controlled from “0%” to “100%” (the transparency (“0%”) of the image 2-1 disposed on the back surface is maintained). Note that the color of the kimono character smoothly changes from the color based on the image 2-3 to the color based on the image 2-1. When step Sa3 ends, the process proceeds to step Sa4.

Step Sa4: The character image (transparency “100%”) arranged on the front surface is deleted, and the character image (character image based on the display order) that has not been arranged on the front surface or the back surface is selected and the back surface is selected. The character image (transparency “0%”) placed on the front is the front, the selected character image (transparency “0%”) is the back, and the kimono characters are placed on the back so that they overlap. The selected character image (transparency “0%”) and the selected character image (transparency “0%”) are arranged so as to overlap each other.

  For example, when the image 2-1 (transparency “100%”) is disposed on the front surface and the image 2-2 (transparency “0%”) is disposed on the rear surface, the image disposed on the front surface. 2-1 (transparency “100%”) is erased, and the image 2-3 that has not been placed over the front or back (the display order following the image 2-2 in the display order “2” that is not erased this time) “3” image 2-3) is selected, and the image 2-2 (transmittance “0%”) placed on the back is set as the front, and the selected image 2-3 (transmittance “0%”) is selected. And the image 2-2 (transparency “0%”) and the image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) are arranged so that the respective kimono characters overlap each other.

  Further, when the image 2-2 (transparency “100%”) is arranged on the front surface and the image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the rear surface, the image arranged on the front surface. 2-2 (transparency “100%”) is erased, and the image 2-1 that has not been placed overlapping the front or back (display order subsequent to the image 2-3 of the display order “3” that is not erased this time) “1” image 2-1. The display order is selected in the order of display order “1” → display order “2” → display order “3” → display order “1” →. With the image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) placed on the back as the front and the selected image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) as the back, the respective kimono characters overlap. The image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) and the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) are arranged so as to overlap each other.

  Further, when the image 2-3 (transparency “100%”) is arranged on the front surface and the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the rear surface, the image arranged on the front surface. 2-3 (transparency “100%”) is erased and the display order following the image 2-1 of the display order “1” that is not erased this time is not placed on the front or back side “2” image 2-2) is selected, and the image 2-1 (transmittance “0%”) placed on the back is set as the front, and the selected image 2-2 (transmittance “0%”) is selected. And the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) and the image 2-2 (transparency “0%”) are arranged so that the respective kimono characters overlap each other. When step Sa4 ends, the process proceeds to step Sa5.

Step Sa5: It is determined whether or not the display end time has come (for example, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the execution time of Step Sa1 (or Step Sa2) has reached a predetermined display time). When it is determined that the display end time has come, both of the two types of character images arranged in an overlapping manner are deleted, and the entire process (steps Sa1 to Sa5) is ended. If it is determined that the display end time has not come, the process returns to step Sa3.

  In addition, the process timing of step Sa5 is an example, Comprising: You may perform the process of step Sa5 once or twice or more including another timing. For example, step Sa5 may be executed between the process of step Sa3 and the process of step Sa4. Further, the process of step Sa5 may be executed once or twice or more during the process of step Sa3. Further, the process of step Sa5 may be executed once or twice or more during the process of step Sa4.

  In FIG. 53, the processing within the time (“Tb1” to “Tb2”) between the time “Tb1” and the time “Tb2” can be realized in the above-described steps Sa3 and Sa4. The processing within the time (“Tb2” to “Tb3”) between the time “Tb2” and the time “Tb3” can also be realized in the above-described steps Sa3 and Sa4. Similarly, the processing within the time between the time “Tb3” and the time “Tb4” (“Tb3” to “Tb4”) is also the time between the time “Tb4” and the time “Tb5” (“Tb4” to “Tb5”). )) And the processing within the time between the time “Tb5” and the time “Tb6” (“Tb5” to “Tb6”) and the time between the time “Tb6” and the time “Tb7” (“Tb6”). ”To“ Tb7 ”) can also be realized in steps Sa3 and Sa4. Further, the processing within the time (“Ta1” to “Ta5”) between the time “Ta1” and the time “Ta5” in FIG. 49A can be realized in the above-described step Sa3. That is, the control when using two types of character images and the control when using three types of character images can be performed by common processing (step Sa3 described above). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 uses the three types of character images as shown in FIG. 53 in the same manner as the control when two types of character images are used as shown in FIG. Control can be performed.

  The above steps Sa1 to Sa5 represent the case of the first transmittance control method. However, when the second transmittance control method is used, the following steps Sb1 to Sb5 are executed. That's fine. It is assumed that the display order is “1” for the image 2-1, the display order “2” for the image 2-1, and the display order “3” for the image 2-3.

Step Sb1: Two types of character images are selected based on the display order among the three types of character images. For example, among the three types of character images, the image 2-1 having the display order “1” and the image 2-1 having the display order “2” are selected. When step Sb1 ends, the process proceeds to step Sb2.

Step Sb2: Arrange the two types of character images so that the kimono characters overlap based on the display order. Further, the transparency of the character image arranged on the front is “100%”, and the transparency of the character image arranged on the back is “0%”. For example, the image 2-2 (transparency “100%”) in the display order “2” is the front surface, the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) in the display order “1” is the back surface, and the image 2-1. The image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) and the image 2-2 are overlapped so that the kimono character of (transparency “0%”) and the kimono character of the image 2-2 (transparency “100%”) overlap. (Transmittance “100%”) is superimposed. When step Sb2 ends, the process proceeds to step Sb3.

Step Sb3: The transparency of the character image arranged on the front is controlled from “100%” to “0%” (the transparency (“0%”) of the character image arranged on the back is maintained). For example, when the image 2-2 (transparency “100%”) is arranged on the front surface and the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the rear surface, the image arranged on the front surface. The transparency of 2-2 is controlled from “100%” to “0%” (the transparency (“0%”) of the image 2-1 disposed on the back surface is maintained). Note that the color of the kimono character smoothly changes from the color of the image 2-1 to the color of the image 2-2 by the control. When the image 2-3 (transparency “100%”) is arranged on the front surface and the image 2-2 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the rear surface, the image 2- 3 is controlled from “100%” to “0%” (the transparency (“0%”) of the image 2-2 arranged on the back surface is maintained). Note that the color of the kimono character smoothly changes from the color according to the image 2-2 to the color according to the image 2-3 by the control. When the image 2-1 (transparency “100%”) is arranged on the front surface and the image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the back surface, the image 2- The transparency of 1 is controlled from “100%” to “0%” (the transparency (“0%”) of the image 2-3 arranged on the back surface is maintained). Note that the color of the kimono character smoothly changes from the color based on the image 2-3 to the color based on the image 2-1. When step Sb3 ends, the process proceeds to step Sb4.

Step Sb4: The character image (transparency “0%”) arranged on the back surface is erased, and the character image (character image based on the display order) that has not been placed on the front surface or the back surface is selected. The character image (transparency “0%”) placed on the front is the back, the selected character image (transparency “100%”) is the front, and the kimono characters are placed in front so that they overlap. The character image (transparency “0%”) and the selected character image (transparency “100%”) are arranged so as to overlap each other.

  For example, when the image 2-2 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the front and the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the back, the image arranged on the back 2-1 (transparency “0%”) is erased, and the image 2-3 that has not been placed overlapping the front or back (the display order following the image 2-2 of the display order “2” that is not erased this time) “3” image 2-3) is selected, and the image 2-2 (transmittance “0%”) placed on the front is set as the back, and the selected image 2-3 (transmittance “100%”) is selected. The image 2-2 (transparency “0%”) and the image 2-3 (transparency “100%”) are overlapped so that the kimono characters overlap each other.

  In addition, when the image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the front surface and the image 2-2 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the rear surface, the image arranged on the rear surface. 2-2 (transparency “0%”) is erased, and the image 2-1 that has not been placed on the front or back is displayed (the display order following the image 2-3 of the display order “3” that is not erased this time) “1” image 2-1. The display order is selected in the order of display order “1” → display order “2” → display order “3” → display order “1” →. The image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) placed on the front is the back, the selected image 2-1 (transparency “100%”) is the front, and the kimono characters overlap each other. The image 2-3 (transmittance “0%”) and the image 2-1 (transmittance “100%”) are arranged so as to overlap each other.

  Further, when the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the front surface and the image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the back surface, the image arranged on the back surface. 2-3 (transparency “0%”) is erased, and the image 2-2 that has not been placed over the front or back (display sequence subsequent to the image 2-1 in the display sequence “1” that is not erased this time) “2” image 2-2) is selected, and the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) placed on the front is used as the back, and the selected image 2-2 (transparency “100%”) is selected. And the image 2-1 (transparency “0%”) and the image 2-2 (transparency “100%”) are arranged so as to overlap each other. When step Sb4 ends, the process proceeds to step Sb5.

Step Sb5: It is determined whether or not the display end time has come (for example, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the execution time of Step Sb1 (or Step Sb2) has reached a predetermined display time). When it is determined that the display end time has come, the two types of superimposed character images are both erased, and the entire process (steps Sb1 to Sb5) ends. When it is determined that the display end time is not reached, the process returns to step Sb3.

  In addition, the process timing of step Sb5 is an example, Comprising: You may perform the process of step Sb5 once or twice or more including another timing. For example, step Sb5 may be executed between the process of step Sb3 and the process of step Sb4. Further, the process of step Sb5 may be executed once or twice or more during the process of step Sb3. Further, the process of step Sb5 may be executed once or twice or more during the process of step Sb4.

  As described above, similarly to the case of using the first transparency control method, the control when using two types of character images and the case of using three types of character images also when using the second transparency control method. Control can be performed by a common process (step Sb3 described above). The same applies when there are four or more character images.

  When there are four types of character images (the fourth type is image 2-4 (display order “4”)), the display order is display order “1” → display order “2” → display order. It is repeated as “3” → display order “4” → display order “1” →. That is, in step Sa4 according to the first transparency control method, the image 2-3 (transparency “100%”) is arranged on the front surface, and the image 2-4 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the rear surface. The image 2-3 (transparency “100%”) disposed on the front surface is erased, and the image 2-1 or the image 2-2 that is not disposed on the front surface or the back surface is deleted. In this case, the image 2-1 in the display order “1” that follows the image 2-4 in the display order “4” that is not erased may be selected. In step Sb4 according to the second transmittance control method, the image 2-4 (transmittance “0%”) is arranged on the front surface, and the image 2-3 (transmittance “0%”) is arranged on the back surface. The image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) arranged on the back surface is erased, and the image 2-1 and the image 2-2 which are not arranged on the front surface or the back surface are deleted. In this case, the image 2-1 in the display order “1” that follows the image 2-4 in the display order “4” that is not erased may be selected.

  When there are five types of character images (the fifth type is image 2-5 (display order “5”)), the display order is display order “1” → display order “2” → display order “3”. “→ Display order“ 4 ”→ Display order“ 5 ”→ Display order“ 1 ”→... That is, in step Sa4 according to the first transparency control method, the image 2-4 (transparency “100%”) is arranged on the front surface and the image 2-5 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the rear surface. If there is, the image 2-4 (transparency “100%”) arranged on the front surface is deleted, and the image 2-1, the image 2-2, and the image that are not arranged on the front surface or the back surface are deleted. It is only necessary to select an image 2-1 in the display order “1” following the image 2-5 in the display order “5” that is not deleted this time. In step Sb4 according to the second transparency control method, the image 2-5 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the front surface, and the image 2-4 (transparency “0%”) is arranged on the rear surface. If there is, the image 2-4 (transparency “0%”) arranged on the back surface is deleted, and the image 2-1, the image 2-2, and the image that are not arranged on the front surface or the back surface are deleted. It is only necessary to select an image 2-1 in the display order “1” following the image 2-5 in the display order “5” that is not deleted this time. The same applies when there are six or more character images.

  The area of the character image is represented by an X coordinate (for example, a1 to a3 in FIG. 48 are X coordinate values) and a Y coordinate (for example, b1 to b3 in FIG. 48 are Y coordinate values). However, the front / back of the character image may be represented by the Z coordinate. For example, the back surface may be the Z coordinate (“value 1”), and the front surface may be the Z coordinate (“value 2”). In the case where the rear surface is set to the Z coordinate (“value 1”) and the front surface is set to the Z coordinate (“value 2”), for example, in step Sa4 according to the first transmittance control method, the image 2- 2 (transparency “0%”) as the front face and the selected image 2-3 (transparency “0%”) as the back face changes the value of the Z coordinate of the image 2-2 from the value 1 to the value 2. This can be realized by changing the value of the Z coordinate of the image 2-3 to the value 1. Further, in step Sb4 according to the second transmittance control method, the image 2-2 (transmittance “0%”) arranged on the front surface is used as the back surface, and the selected image 2-3 (transmittance “100%”) is selected. Can be realized by changing the value of the Z coordinate of the image 2-2 from the value 2 to the value 1 and changing the value of the Z coordinate of the image 2-3 to the value 2.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. The character whose color changes over time by the first transparency control method (or the second transparency control method) as described above can be displayed in various scenes. For example, it may be displayed during variable display as shown in FIG. Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 56B, an example of a technique for displaying a character whose color changes with time during variable display will be described.

  Three types of character images (image 2-1, image 2-2, image 2-3 in FIG. 52) are stored in the ROM 121 in advance. Further, as shown in FIG. 53, any two of the above-described three types of character images are arranged so as to overlap (both have transparency “0%”), and the transparency of the character image arranged on the front side is 0% ( An effect control pattern (control pattern according to the first transmittance control method) for gradually changing from non-transmission) to 100% (complete transmission) is stored in the ROM 121 in advance. It should be noted that the effect control pattern (the effect control pattern according to the first transparency control method) that gradually changes the transparency of the character image arranged on the front side from 0% (non-transparent) to 100% (completely transparent). Instead of or in addition, any two of the above-mentioned three types of character images are arranged so as to overlap (front side transparency “100%”, back side transparency “0%”) and on the front side. An effect control pattern (effect control pattern according to the second transparency control method) for gradually changing the transparency of the arranged character image from 100% (complete transmission) to 0% (non-transmission) is stored. Also good.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect control pattern according to the above-described first transparency control method (or the effect control pattern according to the second transparency control method) in the process of step S740 of FIG. Set as For example, the effect control pattern according to the first transparency control method (or the effect according to the second transparency control method) for the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect based on the variation pattern (regardless of the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous effect) Control pattern) is stored, and an effect control pattern according to the first transparency control method (or an effect control pattern according to the second transparency control method) is set as an effect usage pattern based on the variation pattern. Good. Thereby, during the variable display, as shown in (b) of FIG. 56, a kimono character whose color changes with time can be displayed as an effect based on the variation pattern (an effect determined in step S720). . For example, when the variation pattern is a big hit, a kimono character that displays a kimono whose rainbow color changes smoothly with time may be displayed. Note that the color of the entire decorative pattern (or the color of a part of the decorative pattern), the color of the background (or the color of a part of the background), and the like may be changed over time by a similar method.

  Further, for example, an effect control pattern according to the first transparency control method (or an effect control pattern according to the second transparency control method) for an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the main notice effect by the main notice pattern. An effect control pattern related to the first transparency control method (or an effect control pattern related to the second transparency control method) may be set as the main notice effect use pattern. As a result, during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 56B, a kimono character whose color changes with time is displayed as the main notice effect (the main notice effect determined in step S723 or step S726). be able to. For example, when the variation pattern is a big hit, a kimono character that displays a kimono whose rainbow color changes smoothly with time may be displayed. Note that the color of the background (or the color of a part of the background) or the like may be changed over time by a similar method.

  Although it has been described that a character whose color changes over time can be displayed in various scenes, for example, the color of the hold display may be changed over time (for example, the rainbow color is smooth over time) You may display a hold display that changes to Specifically, a plurality of types of character images for on-hold display, and an effect control pattern related to the arrangement and transparency control of the plurality of types of character images are stored, and the color of the on-hold display is changed over time. In such a case (for example, in the case of a big hit variation category), the above-described effect control pattern may be set in the hold addition process in step S163 of FIG.

  For example, the color of the digestion display (active display) may be changed over time (for example, a hold display in which the rainbow color changes smoothly over time may be displayed). Specifically, a plurality of types of character images for digestion display, and an effect control pattern related to the arrangement and transparency control of the plurality of types of character images are stored, and the color of the digestion display is changed over time. In the case of changing (for example, when the variation pattern is a big hit), the above-described effect control pattern may be set in the pending digest process in step S713 of FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that includes a display unit (for example, the image display device 5) and is capable of a predetermined game, and is a specific character (for example, the kimono character of FIG. Display, digestion display, etc.) as a character image (for example, the character image of FIG. 51, the character image for hold display, the character image for digestion display, etc.) A first character image (for example, image 2-1 in FIG. 52A) displayed in color and a second color in which the specific character having the same shape as the first character image is different from the first color. Image storage means (for example, ROM 121) for storing the second character image (for example, image 2-2 in FIG. Image arrangement means for arranging the first character image and the second character image so that the specific character in the character image and the specific character in the second character image overlap (for example, as shown in FIG. 53) And the transparency control means (for example, processing for arranging the image 2-1, the image 2-2, etc.) and the transparency control means for controlling the transparency of the character image arranged by the image arrangement means (for example, 53, the effect control CPU 120 includes a process for controlling the transparency of the image 2-1, the image 2-2, etc., and the image arranging means is configured to include the first character image. Is superimposed on the front of the second character image (for example, at time “Tb1” in FIG. 53, the image 2-1 is superimposed on the front of the image 2-2. The transparency control unit performs control to change the transparency of the first character image with time (for example, from time “Tb1” to time “Tb2” in FIG. 53) The degree of control over time is being controlled).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect without increasing the data capacity.

  The specific character having the same shape as the first character image is displayed in a second color different from the first color. The character in the first character image and the character in the second character image are It means that the shape is the same and only the color is different. Further, if the character in the first character image and the character in the second character image have the same size and shape and only the color is different, the sizes and shapes of the first character image and the second character image (the character images The size and shape may be the same or different. In short, it is sufficient that the first character image and the second character image can be arranged so as to overlap each other so that the character in the first character image and the character in the second character image exactly overlap at the same display position. It doesn't matter if they overlap exactly. Note that a place other than the character in the character image may be always transparent (transmittance 100%).

  Specifically, the transparency control unit performs control to change the transparency of the first character image from non-transparent to complete transmission over time (for example, as a first transparency control method, FIG. As shown in 53, the control for changing the transparency of the image 2-1 from “0% (non-transmission)” to “100% (complete transmission)” with time from time “Tb1” to time “Tb2”. It is carried out).

  According to the said structure, a specific character can change from a 1st color to a 2nd color, and can improve an effect.

  In addition, the transparency control means can perform control to change the transparency of the first character image from complete transmission to non-transmission over time (for example, as a second transparency control method, FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, it is also possible to perform control to change the transparency of the image 1-1 from “100% (complete transmission)” to “0% (non-transmission)” over time.

  According to the said structure, a specific character can change from a 2nd color to a 1st color, and can improve an effect.

  The transparency control means performs control to change the transparency of the first character image over time at a constant rate from the start to the end of the control.

  According to the said structure, a color can change smoothly and it can improve an effect.

  The certain ratio may be based on the display frame rate in the image display device 5, for example. For example, assuming that the frame rate of display on the image display device 5 is 15 fps (Frames Per Second), the transparency of the first character image is changed from “0%” to “100%” (or “ When changing from “100%” to “0%”, since there are (N × 15 (pieces)) frames in N seconds, 100 ÷ (N × 15) may be set to a constant ratio. When the transparency of the first character image is changed from “0%” to “100%” (or “100%” to “0%”) in a second, the certain ratio may be about 6.66%. In other words, the transparency of the character image in each frame may be increased (or decreased) by about 6.66% in 1 second (between 15 frames), and the first character image in 3 seconds. Transparent When the degree is changed from “0%” to “100%” (or “100%” to “0%”), the constant ratio may be about 2.22%, ie 3 seconds (45 frames). In between, the transparency of the character image in each frame may be increased (or decreased) by about 2.22%.

  Assuming that the frame rate of display on the image display device 5 is 30 fps, the transparency of the first character image is changed from “0%” to “100%” (or “100%” to “100%” in N seconds). 0%), since there are (N × 30 (pieces)) frames in N seconds, 100 ÷ (N × 30) may be set to a constant ratio, for example, the first in 1 second. When the transparency of the character image is changed from “0%” to “100%” (or “100%” to “0%”), the certain ratio may be about 3.33%. In a second (between 30 frames), the transparency of the character image in each frame may be increased (or decreased) by about 3.33%, and the transparency of the first character image may be “0” in 3 seconds. % "To" 100% "(or When changing from “100%” to “0%”, the fixed ratio may be about 1.11%, that is, the transparency of the character image in each frame is about 3 seconds (between 90 frames). It may be increased (or decreased) by 1.11%.

  Note that the above-described certain ratio may be varied depending on the color of the character image. For example, in consideration of human vision (sensitivity to each color of the viewer), the transmittance may be changed at a rate corresponding to the color of the character image. For example, from a character image of a character of a blue color (for example, a character having a blue color as a whole character, although a main part may include a color of a blue color even if there are many colors other than the blue color) The character image of a character of red color (for example, a character having a red color as a whole. However, even if there are many colors other than the red color, the main part may include a red color) Therefore, the transparency of the character image of the red color character may be changed faster (at a higher rate) than the character image of the blue color character. For example, the transparency of the character image of a character of blue color is changed from “0%” to “100%” (or “100%” to “0%”) in M seconds, while the red color of the character image is changed. The transparency of the character image of the character may be changed from “0%” to “100%” (or “100%” to “0%”) in a time shorter than M seconds.

  Further, the above-mentioned certain ratio may be varied according to the color of the front character image and the color of the back character image. For example, when a character image of a red-colored character is placed on at least one of the front or back, and when a character image of a red-colored character is not placed on either the front or back In comparison, the transmittance may be changed quickly (at a high rate). Specifically, for example, after arranging a character image of green color (transparency “0%”) on the front and a character image of blue color (transparency “0%”) on the back, The character image of green color (transparency “0%”) is displayed in front of the rate of change when the transparency of the character image of green color in the front is changed from “0%” to “100%”. After the character image of red color (transparency “0%”) is placed on the back, the transparency of the character image of green color on the front is changed from “0%” to “100%” You may raise the rate of change when making it. In other words, the time for the green color character to change to the red color may be shorter than the time for the green color character to change to the blue color.

  The image storage means displays the specific character (for example, the kimono character in FIG. 51) having the same shape as the first character image in a third color different from the first color and the second color. A third character image (for example, the image 2-3 in FIG. 52C) is stored, and the image arranging means stores the second character image (for example, the image 2-2 in FIG. 52B). The second character image is placed in front of the third character image so that the specific character in the third character image and the specific character in the third character image overlap (for example, at time “Tb2” in FIG. 2-2 is placed over the front of the image 2-3), and the transparency control means controls the transparency of the first character image (for example, the time “Tb1” in FIG. 53). After controlling the transparency of the image 2-1 from “0% (non-transmission)” to “100% (complete transmission)” over time at the time “Tb2” (for example, the time of FIG. 53) At the time “Tb3” from “Tb2”, control is performed to change the transparency of the second character image from “0% (non-transparent)” to “100% (completely transparent)” over time. . That is, the first transparency control method is performed even when there is a third character image.

  According to the said structure, a specific character can also change to a 3rd color and can improve an effect.

  The image storage means displays the specific character (for example, the kimono character in FIG. 51) having the same shape as the first character image in a third color different from the first color and the second color. A third character image (for example, the image 2-3 in FIG. 52C) is stored, and the image arranging means stores the second character image (for example, the image 2-2 in FIG. 52B). The second character image is arranged on the front surface of the third character image so that the specific character in the third character image overlaps with the specific character in the third character image, and the transparency control means includes the second character image. After controlling the transparency of the first character image (complete transmission → non-transmission), the transparency of the first character image may be changed over time from complete transmission to non-transmission. That is, the second transparency control method may be performed even when there is a third character image.

  According to the said structure, a specific character can also change to a 3rd color and can improve an effect.

  51. Character images (for example, the character image of FIG. 51, the character image for hold display, the character image for display during digestion, etc.) for displaying a specific character (for example, the kimono character of FIG. 51, hold display, display during digestion, etc.) ), When there are three or more types of character images, the following control is performed.

  For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is an image selection unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, for effect control) that selects the character images superimposed by the image arrangement unit according to a predetermined selection order. The CPU 120 includes a process of selecting two of the images 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 that are arranged in an overlapping manner, and the image storage means is different in the specific character having the same shape. A plurality of character images (for example, image 2-) including the first character image (for example, image 2-1) and the second character image (for example, image 2-2) displayed in color. 1, image 2-2, image 2-3, etc.), and the image placement means performs the two character images selected by the image selection means in accordance with a predetermined overlapping order. The transparency control means controls the transparency of the character image on the front (for example, as shown in FIG. 53). The transparency of the front character image is controlled from “0% (non-transparent)” to “100% (completely transparent)”, and the image selecting means When the control of the transparency is completed, the image placement means selects the character image to be placed on the back (see FIG. 53). That is, the first transparency control method can be applied even when there are three or more types of character images.

  In addition, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment has image selection means (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, effect control) that selects the character images that are arranged by the image arrangement means in accordance with a predetermined selection order. CPU 120 includes a process of selecting two of the images 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 that are arranged in an overlapping manner, and the image storage means includes the specific character having the same shape. A plurality of character images (for example, image 2) including the first character image (for example, image 2-1) and the second character image (for example, image 2-2) displayed in different colors. -1, image 2-2, image 2-3, etc.), and the image arranging means follows the predetermined overlapping order of the two character images selected by the image selecting means. The transparency control means controls the transparency of the character image on the front surface (controls from “100% (complete transmission)” to “0% (non-transmission)”), and the image When the transparency control of the front character image by the transparency control unit is completed, the selection unit selects the character image (ie, “100% (complete transmission) initially) that the image placement unit places on the front. Character image to be displayed with a transparency of “” may be selected. That is, the second transparency control method can be applied even when there are three or more types of character images.

  According to the said structure, a specific character can also change to another color and can improve a production effect.

  In addition, the image storage means has a predetermined display order (for example, image 2-1 → image 2-2 → image 2-3 → image 2-1 → image 2-2 → image 2-3,. When the character images are displayed one by one in the order of image 2-3 → image 2-2 → image 2-1 → image 2-3 → image 2-2 → image 2-1,. A plurality of the character images (for example, image 2-1, image 2-2, image 2-3, etc.) whose color changes cyclically in a color space (for example, see FIG. 47) are stored. The arrangement means arranges the character images with the display order first so as to be in front or back.

  For example, in the case of the first transparency control method, image 2-1 → image 2-2 → image 2-3 → image 2-1 → image 2-2 → image 2-3 →. Sequentially, it is superimposed on the back with a transparency of “0% (non-transparent)”. Then, another image is arranged on the back side and the transparency of the image on the front side is changed from “0% (non-transmission)” to “100% (complete transmission)”. As a result, images 2-1 → image 2-2 → image 2-3 → image 2-1 → image 2-2 → image 2-3 →... Are displayed in this order (see FIG. 53). That is, the character image with the first display order is placed on the front and the character image with the later display order is placed on the back. On the other hand, in the case of the second transparency control method, for example, image 2-1 → image 2-2 → image 2-3 → image 2-1 → image 2-2 → image 2-3 →. Then, the light is sequentially superimposed on the front surface with a transmittance of “100% (complete transmission)”. Then, the transparency of the image arranged on the front surface is changed from “100% (complete transmission)” to “0% (non-transmission)”. As a result, images 2-1 → image 2-2 → image 2-3 → image 2-1 → image 2-2 → image 2-3 →. That is, the character image with the first display order is placed on the back and the character image with the later display order is on the front.

  According to the above configuration, the color of the specific character can be changed cyclically.

  The transparency control means can also control the transparency of the second character image in the same manner as the control of the transparency of the first character image. For example, in the case of using the first transparency control method, the control of the transparency of the first character image and the transparency of the second character image may be controlled by the above-described common processing (step Sa3). . For example, in the case of the second transparency control method, the control of the transparency of the first character image and the transparency of the second character image are controlled by the above-described common processing (step Sb3). Just do it.

  According to the above configuration, the processing capacity can be prevented from increasing.

  In addition, you may perform different control about each character image (each of the several character image from which only a color differs). For example, for a certain character image (for example, a green character image), the transparency is changed from “0% (non-transparent)” to “100% (completely transparent)” based on the first rate (for example, based on the frame rate). For other character images (for example, red character images), the first ratio is changed from “0% (non-transparent)” to “100% (completely transparent)”. May be changed by different second ratios (for example, 2%, etc.). In addition, with respect to a certain character image, control (first transparency control method) is performed so that the transparency is changed from “0% (non-transparent)” to “100% (completely transparent)”. With regard to, control (second transmittance control method) may be performed so as to change the transmittance from “100% (complete transmission)” to “0% (non-transmission)”. Moreover, you may perform different control according to a display scene. For example, even for the same character, different control may be performed depending on whether it is displayed before reaching or after reaching.

  Each of the character images (for example, the character image of FIG. 52, etc.) is from a first region (for example, a region above the kimono character's kimono) to a second region (for example, a region below the kimono character's kimono). The first character image (for example, the character image of FIG. 52A) has a gradation region (for example, the kimono character region of the kimono character in FIG. 52) at the same position. The gradation area in FIG. 1 is a stepwise change from a first color (for example, a green color) to a second color (for example, a red color) from the first area to the second area. The gradation area in the second character image (for example, the character image in FIG. 52B) is the second color (from the first area to the second area). Example, red color, etc.) from the third color (e.g., may be one stepwise changes to color, etc.) of the blue.

  According to the above configuration, the color changes more smoothly from the first region to the second region.

  The character image (for example, the character image of FIG. 52) is displayed in a specific area (for example, the area “16” or the area “19”) displayed in a specific color (for example, the color “K9” or the color “R4”). ) At the same position.

  According to the said structure, a production effect can be heightened.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine 1000). The slot machine 1000 has, for example, at least one of a big bonus, a regular bonus, a single bonus (hereinafter collectively referred to as a bonus), RT (Replay Time), AT (Assist Time), and ART (Assist Replay Time). Anything provided is acceptable.

  The slot machine 1000 is configured so that, for example, a cylindrical left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel can be seen through a see-through window provided on the front door. A MAXBET switch for setting a number, a start switch for starting a game, a left stop switch for stopping each reel, a middle stop switch, a right stop switch, and a game display unit for displaying information related to the game . For example, when the player inserts a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 3) into the medal insertion part (or operates the MAXBET switch) and then operates the start switch, the game of the slot machine 1000 starts (for each reel). Rotation starts). After the game starts, if the player operates each stop switch in turn and operates the third stop switch, the game ends (the rotation of all the reels stops), and a pattern corresponding to a predetermined role When a combination of (designs arranged (printed or the like) on the surface of each reel) is derived (aligned) as a display result, a winning corresponding to the combination is generated. Note that the player can check the display result through the fluoroscopic window.

  The RAM of the slot machine 1000 stores a game state flag indicating a current game state among a plurality of types of game states, a winning flag indicating a winning combination, and the like. The winning combination lottery is performed based on the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag (the winning probability varies depending on the gaming state). Also, the game state transitions according to various winnings, winnings, number of digested games, and the like.

  The normal gaming state is a normal gaming state and a gaming state with a low medal payout rate. The internal state is a gaming state in the game from when the special combination is won until the special combination wins. The bonus state is a gaming state that is shifted by the occurrence of a special role winning, and the winning probability of a small role (for example, bell) is significantly higher than the normal gaming state, and the medal payout rate is much higher than the normal gaming state The gaming state becomes higher. The RT state is, for example, a gaming state that transitions after winning the RT lottery (or after digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games)), and is a replay (re-game player) winning compared to the normal gaming state. A gaming state with a high probability. The AT state is, for example, a so-called push state in which an AT lottery is won (or after a predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games) has been consumed) and a transition is made according to a predetermined condition (for example, an entry replay win). When a forward navigation is displayed and a stop switch is operated in accordance with the forward navigation, a winning combination (for example, a bell or the like) wins, so that the medal payout rate is higher than the normal gaming state. The ART state is, for example, a gaming state that transitions according to a predetermined condition (for example, a prize for a rush replay) after winning an ART lottery (or after digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games)). When the navigation is displayed and the stop switch is operated in accordance with the push order navigation, the winning combination (for example, replay, bell, etc.) wins, so that the gaming state is higher in medal payout rate than the normal gaming state. The high probability gaming state is a gaming state that transitions after winning a special role (or after digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games)), and is a special role (or RT lottery, Or, it is a gaming state in which the winning probability of AT lottery or ART lottery is high.

  The bonus state, the RT state, the AT state, the ART state, and the high-probability gaming state are specific gaming states because they are advantageous to the player as compared to the normal gaming state.

  The role lottery, RT lottery, AT lottery, and ART lottery are performed based on the gaming state indicated by the current gaming state flag stored in the RAM at the start of the game (immediately after the start switch is operated), for example. The winning flag of the winning combination is stored. The winning is determined by, for example, a winning flag stored in the RAM, an operation timing of a stop switch, or the like. The predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games) may be determined by lottery from a plurality of types of games at the time of transition from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state (for example, When the ceiling game count value is cleared, the next ceiling game number may be drawn by lottery), or when the transition from the specific game state to the normal game state, it is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of games. (The number of ceiling games of this time may be drawn by lottery just before starting to count the ceiling games). In addition to or instead of the above, the predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games) is determined, for example, depending on what the specific game state immediately before the transition to the normal game state is. Yes. For example, 1000 games after the big bonus, 800 games after the regular bonus, and 500 games after the AT (ART) may be used. Further, the predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games) may be determined according to what was the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state in addition to or instead of the above. For example, there are a plurality of normal states (eg, mode A, mode B, heaven mode, etc.), 500 games after a big bonus entered from mode A or mode B, 128 games after a big bonus entered from heaven mode, etc. It is good.

  In the game display unit, for example, an effect (for example, a mission effect, an event effect, or a battle effect) may be performed before the transition from the normal game state to the specific game state. The presence / absence of the effect and the content of the effect are determined according to, for example, a lottery result at the start of the game or whether a predetermined number of games have been consumed. In addition, in the game display unit, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) that can be identified are variably displayed.

  That is, the gaming machine according to the present invention is the slot machine 1000 as described above, and, like the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of character images are arranged so that specific characters overlap, and the character image is transmitted. By controlling the degree, a specific character whose color changes may be displayed on the game display unit or the like.

  Various contents (including modifications) described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can also be applied to the slot machine 1000.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5H ... Start winning memory display area 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary winning ball device 6C ... Normal Variable winning ball apparatus 7 ... Special variable winning ball apparatus 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... 1st start port switch 22B ... 2nd start port switch 22C ... 3rd start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 200 ... Sorting device 201 ... Inlet 202 ... Sorting member 203 ... Left passage 204 ... Right passage 205 ... Left outlet 206 ... Right outlet 1000 ... Slot machine

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a display means and capable of a predetermined game,
As the character image for displaying the specific character, at least the first character image in which the specific character is displayed in the first color, and the specific character having the same shape as the first character image are the first color. Image storage means for storing a second character image displayed in a different second color;
Image arrangement means for arranging the first character image and the second character image so that the specific character in the first character image and the specific character in the second character image overlap;
Transparency control means for controlling the transparency of the character image placed by the image placement means,
The first character image is an image arranged so that the color gradually changes from the first color to the second color from the first region to the second region,
The second character image is an image arranged so that the color gradually changes from the second color to the third color from the first region to the second region,
The image arrangement means arranges the first character image so as to overlap the front surface of the second character image,
The transparency control means changes the transparency of the first character image over time so that the second color is visually recognized as moving between the first area and the second area. Predetermined control can be executed,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined portion of the specific character is displayed in the same color regardless of whether the predetermined control is executed .